Home

QX-870 Industrial Raster Scanner User`s Manual

1. QX 1 ae mh ims a CIO gt C gt Soyo oat M i T m HE To Power l Supply lt 7 HL To Power Eg QX 1 i Multidrop a a Supply Concentrator Host or PLC 3 8 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Port Routing Hardware Installation The physical advantages created by flexible signal routing and switching are enhanced further by Port Routing which can be configured in ESP Port Routing eliminates the need for dedicated Host and Aux ports in a traditional sense With Port Routing any port can be defined as a Host or Aux port Port Routing also allows users to define the data types that are accessible from specific ports The primary benefit of Port Routing is that any type of data can be routed to any port and can be sent through multiple ports simultaneously Multiple types of data can also be appended to the symbol data that is output from the scanner to the host Command data symbol data extra symbol information and diagnostic data are enabled by default in the QX 870 The table below lists different types of data with examples for each data type Data Type Example Command Data Serial commands scanner responses to serial commands Symbol Data Any string of data encoded in a symbol Extra Symbol Information Decodes per trigger decode direction configuration database index number Diagnostic Data Laser status temperat
2. QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 127 I O Parameters Laser Framing When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to frame the symbol automatically Framing is based on symbol readability The frame line will be decreased until a drop in read performance is detected Once the line length is found then a small margin is added to account for variation Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Calibrate Symbol Type When set to Calibrate all supported symbologies except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration Symbol lengths are not detected Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process All enabled symbologies will remain enabled For example assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will be enabled at the end of calibration Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Don t Calibrate Calibrate 5 128 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Database Identifier Output Useful in tracking which database entries read which symbols Database Identifier Outpu
3. Beeper Quality Output Symbol Data Output lt K702 status gt lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status decode direction output gt lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data symbology i d output status gt Read Duration Output No Read Message lt K706 status separator gt lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 status message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Green Flash LED lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 status bar graph I O 1 1 0 2 gt Symbol Position Output lt K758 raster position output status scan position output status separator gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button EZ Button Modes Auto Framing Options Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K770 status default on power on gt lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt lt K773 laser framing gt lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 high tem
4. Current Legacy e eebo eek amp G 830 0 870 MS 890 M5 Connect M5 Connect eeeee Quads MIN Heads Quadrus MINI MINI Hawk Gd Hawk MINI 3 Velocity EEEn H5 2D MS O Mobile Hawk Quadrue Venter HE4xT Description 07 870 Show this dialog at startup C Skip EZ Mode 1 Click the button showing the QX 870 2 Click OK Note The QX 870 can also be selected by double clicking the button showing the QX 870 3 Click Yes when this dialog appears Would vou like bo connect bo the 9 8707 Mo Note To select another model later click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model gt New Model in the menu toolbar 1 6 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Connect Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on the menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect RS 232 Ethernet Baud IP Address 162 148 88 51 N ORS 232 l a Parity one Ethernet TCP Port 2001 S Stop Bits Data Bits Port RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible QX 87
5. lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnnd gt Default Customer Parameter This request will default a single K command if the command has customer defined parameters rather than factory defined parameters 7 22 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Other Serial Utility Commands Calibration without Menu Sending the lt CAL gt command from ESP s Terminal initiates auto calibration without entering the auto calibration menu The calibrated parameters are determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command Calibration with Menu Sending the lt gt command from ESP s Terminal enters the auto calibration menu The Initial state of the menu is determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command AUTO CALIBRATION MENU to make changes press appropriate key MENU ACTIONS MENU SELECTIONS Start Auto Calibration i Exit Calibration Menu ESC Recall Initial Se ees ond Save Settings to Databa mie ane x AutoFrame ae a whaiaie CONFIGURATION INCR DECR racking T ee R ET ow CALIBRATION OPTIONS PDF Test K DISABLED Motor Speed U YES Laser Power I NO aser Frame J YES
6. ACK f NAK Options RES MUL REQ MUL STX MUL ETX MUL ACK ALK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STA STA ETX ETA ACK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LEC Status Disabled izabled Enabled 5 28 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual External Data Routing Scanner Parameters External Data Routing settings configure the global operation of all external data port settings External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS232 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk ak ETA CR Output at Timeout 200 External Data Routing Options Se External Daka Routing Destination Port Disabled Ambles to Source Transparent Echo to Source Half Duplex Output at End of Read Cycle Full Duplex Custom Mutpuk at ETA R Oukput at Timeout U0 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Disabled 5 29 Communication Transparent Mode When Transparent Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Enabled Output at ETX Fixed to Enabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Enabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disa
7. Standalone with QX 1 Standalone without QX 1 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 1 3 Position Scanner and Symbol Step 3 Position Scanner and Symbol e Place a test symbol in a location with as little ambient light as possible e Position the scanner at the focal distance used in the application e Align the test symbol with the scanner s field of view e Tip the scanner relative to the test symbol to avoid glare from specular reflection Skew D lt ee Tilt Symbol lt Maximum ii 4 skew tilt and pitch 30 e ar Pitch Scanner 1 4 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Install ESP ESP Software can be found on the Microscan Tools CD that is packaged with the QX 870 1 Follow the prompts to install ESP from the CD 2 Click on the ESP icon to run the program Note ESP can also be installed from the Download Center at www microscan com Minimum System Requirements e 166 MHz Pentium processor Pentium II processor recommended e Windows Vista XP or 2000 operating system e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e 64 MB minimum RAM 128 MB RAM recommended e 80 MB hard drive space e 800 x 600 minimum 256 color display 1024 x 768 32 bit color recommended QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 1 5 Select Model Step 5 Select Model When ESP is opened the following menu will appear Select a Model Curent
8. e Apply power to the scanner e Locate default pin and ground e Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps e Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner if this feature is enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 21 Scanner Status Requests Scanner Status Requests lt K gt All Status Request This is the fastest way to learn the scanner s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request This request will return all current descriptors for every K command starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command
9. Important Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000 changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined from 1 to 10 Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 7 428 8 375 9 333 10 300 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 11 Master Database Enter Master Symbol Data Allows the user to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed Enter data for 1 to 10 master symbols Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols to be created in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each master symbol number in the table type master symbol data in the popup dialog that appears and click OK 4 When all master symbol data has been entered click the Send Database to the Reader button Master Symbol Database Size i Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5
10. QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 151 I O Parameters Laser Current Low Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 2 Parameters Mutpur On Mutpuk State Pulse width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Low Temperature Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open ol Pulse No Read T 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Activates output when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 2 Parameters Output on Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Humber to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature 5 152 Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open o0 Pulse Mo Read T T j Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled izabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output 3 Parameters Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis
11. QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Cmd lt K201 serial trigger character gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character External Trigger State Serial Cmd lt K202 active state gt Default 1 Positive Options 0 Negative 1 Positive End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 0 Timeout Options 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or New Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Read Cycle Timeout Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 100 x10 ms 1 second Options 1 to 65535 Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 1 Options 1 to 255 Mode Serial Cmd lt K221 decodes before output mode gt Default 0 Non Consecutive Options 0 Non Consecutive 1 Consecutive Multisymbol Number of Symbols Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default 1 Options 1 to 100 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 39 Serial Commands Multisymbol Separator Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Start Trigger Start Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K229 start character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options
12. Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Firmware Update App Code Start Firmware Verhication App Code Request Part No App Code Request Checksum Firmware Update Firmware Update is used to download application code to the scanner Application code versions are specific to the scanner Consult with a sales representative before downloading application code If needed application boot code in the form of a mot file can be requested To download application code 1 First be sure that the scanner is connected to the host computer 2 Apply power to the scanner 3 In the Firmware Update dropdown menu select App Code This will open a dialog that allows the user to browse for the application code file 4 Navigate to where the application code file a mot file is located on the host computer 5 Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download As the application code begins to download the scanner will be silent the LEDs will flash intermittently and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will show when the download is complete Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 17 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number Send a request to the scanner for application code boot code or FPGA code part
13. Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt High Temperature Threshold lt K402 status message gt Low Temperature Threshold lt K403 status message gt Counts Read only lt K406 gt returns power on resets power on saves custom default Saves Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Laser Current Warning Message lt K411 aser high status laser high message laser low status laser low message gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Serial Command Format Microscan readers are controlled by two types of serial commands configuration commands and utility command
14. max 20 sweeps per second Protocols Point to Point Point to Point with RTS CTS Point to Point with XON XOFF Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Multidrop Daisy Chain User Defined Multidrop Ethernet TCP IP EtherNet IP Discrete I O Input 1 Trigger New Master Optoisolated 4 5 28V rated 13 mA at 24VDC New Master is to signal ground Outputs 1 2 3 Optoisolated 1 28V rated lcg lt 100 mA at 24VDC current limited by user A 2 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual QX 1 Interface Device Mechanical Height 75 19 1 mm Width 2 50 83 5 mm Depth 3 15 80 mm Weight 7 oz 200 g 5 19 1mm QX 1 Dimensions QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices General Specifications Read Ranges mm 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 Lra L 8 N a 8 mm 200 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 200 J in 5 0 ote et ee ot Typical scan _ Pasi o o Range 300 250 10 015 10 200 150 oL 0 Typical scan oL 0 mm in area gt 90 mm in Range Range Low Density Medium Density High Density Narrow Bar Width Read Range 0075 191 mm 10 to 12 254 mm to 305 mm 010 254 mm 7 to 16 178 mm to 406 mm Low Density 015 381 mm 6 to 19 152 mm to 483 mm 020 508 mm 5 to 22 127 mm to 559 mm 040 1 02 mm 4 to 30 102 mm
15. to disable I O connections A 102 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual NET and MOD LED Indicators Appendices MOD Module Microscan Indicator State Summary Requirement Implementation If no power is supplied to the device the l SEAU OEE OP ONE module status indicator will be steady OFF PETTEN ENEN Dece If the device is operating correctly the Steady GREEN module status indicator will be steady Per requirement operational GREEN When operating Flashin If the device has not been configured the with default C Standby module status indicator will be flashing parameters GREEN Default status is updated at reset 1 Temperature warning If the device has detected a recoverable 2 Scan sync Flashing RED Minor fault minor fault the module status indicator Missing This will be flashing RED may occur briefly when the scan motor starts and stops 1 Laser current If the device has detected a non recover oe l Steady RED Major fault able minor fault the module status indi s Safe Mode cator will be steady RED ASIC CANUT ONY Scanning system is non functional Flashin While the device is performing its power Per requirement CREEN RED Self test up testing the module status indicator ibut unlikely to be will be flashing GREEN RED seen QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 103 Using EtherNet IP NET Network Microscan Indicator State Summa
16. Check Character Output Status When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled 5 76 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Length 1 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid Symbol Length 1 E 0 128 Symbol Length 2 Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Important If Range Mode Status is set to Disabled the length of the symbol must match either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol lf Range Mode Status is set to Enabled Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered vali
17. Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement Match Start Position Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options 0 to 3000 Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Options 1 to 3000 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 73 Serial Commands Wild Card Character Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default asterisk Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Sequence on No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Master Symbol Database Size Serial Cmd lt K224 number of master symbols gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 New Master Pin Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1
18. On Good Read Green Flash Duration Disabled Beeper On Good Read Static Presentation Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred An array of green LEDs in the front of the scanner can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled On Good Read Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when Matchcode is enabled and a match occurs QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 113 I O Parameters Static Presentation Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode When operating in Static Presentation Mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the scanner is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the scanner is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will not occur To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Match The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will
19. Transition Counter Symbol Detect Status Serial Cmd lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Transition Counter Serial Cmd lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Default 14 Options 1 to 255 Raster Framing Raster Framing Status Serial Cmd lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Top Offset Serial Cmd lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Default 88 Options 0 255 Bottom Offset Serial Cmd lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Default 167 Options 0 255 Sweep Rate Serial Cmd lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Default 10 Options 0 80 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 41 Serial Commands Read Cycle On Off Serial Cmd lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Scan Width Enhance Serial Cmd lt K511 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AGC Tracking Serial Cmd lt K520 tracking value gt Default 40 QX 870 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 5 to 127 Laser Setup Laser On Off Status Serial Cmd lt K700 laser on off status aser framing statu
20. Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Aead Number of Triggers Number to Output On No Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics o E ALEL High Temperature Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 5 136 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 1 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Wi
21. W Fare i Parse Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble eR LF Parse Parse i Enable Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols to SoH sTx ETX EoT ENO ACK BEL Bs HT F o cal aT s De1 Dc2 Dc3 Deal NAK SYN ETB CAN Em sue ESc FS Gs RS US SP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel be formatted QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Enter Postamble characters by double clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator Y Postamble CR LF SOH STX ETX EOT ENO ACK BEL BS HT LF vt FF cal sof si s1 pet Dc2f Des Deal ak SYN ETB CAN Em sue ESc FS GS Rs us sP Click Delete to remove characters Cancel 4 11 Output Format Extract Parse Symbols Receive Quality Parameters Hide Parse T able Symbol Parse i Test ioral 2 4 2 4 Extract The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWHyZ R E I TA Output BCD Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWxv2Z Output BCD Cancel Multiple character sequence
22. 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Check Character Type Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Mod 16 2 NW7 Mod 11 3 Both Mod 16 and NW7 Mod 11 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 51 Serial Commands Check Character Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default
23. 5 134 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 1 Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 135 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 1 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Gutput State Normally Open Pulse Width SO Output Mode Pulse
24. 5 Enabled Enabled Yes T Enabled Disabled Yes Example A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies e For Code 128 a 1 indicates EAN 128 otherwise the modifier is 0 e For all other symbologies the modifier is 0 5 98 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Background Color Symbol backgrounds are often White or other very light colors If the background is darker than the symbol Black background should be enabled Allows the user to specify the symbol background used in the application Background Color white White When White background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as dark on a light background Black When Black background is enabled the bars of linear symbols and the elements of 2D symbols are recognized as light on a dark background QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 99 Symbologies Depth of Field Enhance The Default Depth of Field Enhance setting of Medium will be ideal for 75 of all depth of field issues Low and High account for the other 25 Note Any setting other than Disabled will increase processing requirements Depth of Field Enhance Medium Disabled Low Medium High Disabled No extra processing of elements is performed to extend
25. A best ever read rate value is initialized to 0 to start the calibration process At each motor speed laser power video combination a new read rate is acquired The settings used to acquire the new read rate are recorded as the new best if The new read rate is better than 95 Go to the next motor speed The new read rate is greater than the best read rate Go to the next laser power The new read rate is equal to the best read rate and the motor speed is greater Go to the next laser power The new read rate is equal to the best read rate and the laser power is less Go to the next laser power Set LEDs to display 60 LED on all others off Restore user configured video gain and tracking settings QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 25 Other Serial Utility Commands 18 Perform video calibration if enabled take initial read rate at current settings calibrate video select new gain and tracking take final read rate with new gain and tracking if final read rate is lt 2 video calibration fails if final read rate is gt or initial read rate video calibration passes and new settings take effect if final read rate is lt initial read rate video settings revert to pre calibration values this is not considered a failure all other settings calibrated by other calibration processes like motor speed and laser power 19 Perform raster framing if the raster parameter of the calibration c
26. DLEf Der Dc2 Dca Dca NAK SVN ETB an EM sue Esc _Fs GS AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Supplementals Type As required by symbology used in application Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Supplementals Type Both ioth Two Char Only Five Char Onl Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid Both Two Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid Five Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid 5 84 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters UPC E as UPC A When disabled the scanner will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled the scanner will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification UPC E as UP_ 4 Disabled i 2g b e d x Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 85 Symbologies Code 93 Used in some clinical applications Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology employing four element widths Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white Each character contains three bars and three spaces Cod
27. Enabled A 54 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 Status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 EAN 128 Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Output Format Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Application Application Record Separator Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt De
28. From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Selecting this option will upload the scanner s settings If the ESP file has a number of custom settings that must be maintained and downloaded into the scanner these settings will be lost This function is useful for receiving uploading the scanner s settings and saving them as a file for future use For example if the scanner has settings that must not change Receive Reader Settings would load those settings to ESP and save them in an ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the scanner s settings will also assure that any unwanted subsequent changes in ESP will not be saved Saving Send No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current memory Receive Reader Settings Save to Reader Send Mo Save Send and Save Send and Save lt Z gt Perea wend serena Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default all ESP Settings Activates all changes in current memory and saves to the scanner Advanced Options i for power on Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves default settings for quick retrieval This option will be visible only if Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults is checked in ESP Preferences 2 16 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Defaulting When Default Current Menu Settings or Default all ESP Settings are selected only the ESP settings are defaulted Advanced Options Send Current
29. In this dialog select the Pree ref rs ee Fr Fa rs Fio en F desired function key and then enter the macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F2 the keystroke to send a trigger character select F2 then in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger character gt and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F2 keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the read cycle ey Map ey F2 Clear Key Clear All Keys Alt Shift Ctrl Note The F1 key is reserved for opening ESP Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function Change Font Allows the user to modify the font used for decode data received from the scanner on the Terminal Change Echo Font Allows the user to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal Enable Echo Allows the user to enter command characters in Terminal Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled data from the scanner will continue to appear in the Terminal even when ESP is not the top window QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Bar Code Options Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Sizing Information Caption Bar Height 0 500 Inches Caption Font Bar Width 13 Mils Alignment No Caption Default Settings Sizing Information Sets the bar height i
30. Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 Pharmacode 10 GS1 DataBar RSS 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite Length Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 128 Wildcard Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0x2A Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 81 Serial Commands Placeholder Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default Ox3F Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Data Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Decode Direction Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Any Direction Options 0 Any Direction 1 Forward 2 Reverse Database Index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Defau
31. M12 12 Pin Plug Flying Leads The 61 000166 01 cordset connects to QX 870 Connector B serial and QX 1 Connector 2 BROWN 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 YELLOW GREY GREY PINK RED BLUE Dm DMONAUOAWN i 61 000167 01 QX Cordset M12 12 Pin Socket Flying Leads The 61 000167 01 cordset connects to QX 870 Connectors A and P M and QX 1 Connectors 1 and 3 WHITE BROWN 3000 50 GREEN 100 20 YELLOW GREY PINK RED BLUE 2 3 4 x 6 7 8 9 0 2 A 16 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix E Updated Pin Assignment of QX Connector T Problem The trigger signal from Connector T interferes with the operation of Trigger New Master and Input 1 on Connectors A and B or across multiple scanners if interconnected Cause The Trigger and Common pins from Connector T are not connected to the correct signal within the circuit The standard photo sensor will signal the input common pin instead of the trigger pin The photo sensor signal that is switching the common line will interfere with any inputs wired into Connectors A or B Original pin assignments Connector T Pin Name Photo Sensor 1 iPower Power 2 Input Common NPN 3 Ground Ground 4 Trigger Jumper to Power Note This will only cause an issue if using Trigger New Master or Input 1 on Connectors Aor B Solution The pin assignment of C
32. Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance 5 60 14 6 255 400 Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Maximum Element Maximum Element is the maximum bar element size before a reset Value is in increments of 0 01 of the scanner s full scan width not increments of the framed scan width Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Sain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum 2595 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 4 BO 5000 x 0 01 of scan Scan Width Enhance Disabled Scan Width Enhance The scanner can adjust for Gain differences across the entire scan width This is a useful feature for long symbols that use most of the scan width available Note This command is intended for applications in which symbols are three inches or more from the scanner Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Sain Control 407 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum 0 AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled The scanner will not adjust for scan width variation Enabled The scanner will adjust for scan width variation QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 61 Read Cycle Additional Information about Gain Tracking an
33. Separator Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Separator The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the Multisymbol Separator field As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Separator NUL SOH STX ETX EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f VT Click Delete to remove characters 5 94 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual AIAG Scanner Parameters AIAG is a standard controlled by the Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG is used in automotive applications When AIAG is Enabled each Status field can be Enabled or Disabled and an ID can be defined for each status AIAG ID1 Statusi ID Status2 ID3 Statusa ID4 Status4 IDSa IDSb DSc Statuss IDG Statuses ID Status IDS Statuses IDS Statuss I 10 Statusi 0 I 11 Statusi l ID1iz2 Statusl2 Disabled r Enabled P Disabled Q Disabled Y Disabled 5 m E Disabled H Disabled E Z Disabled E 6 Disabled E D Disabled E Disabled E L Disabled E x Disabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 95 Symbologies Quiet Zone Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Allows the scanner to read 1D symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element The Qu
34. and can only be entered as hex pairs So to make gt the postamble in the symbol decode output enter the Postamble command as follows lt K142h 3E gt Note that the status field contains only a This is because the only field that is being changed is the postamble character s field See Serial Configuration Command Conventions for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut Protocol Selection Protocol Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 ACK NAK 5 Polling Mode A 34 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Address Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Default 1 Options 1 50 1 Poll address 0x1C select address 0x1D 2 Poll address Ox1E select address 0x1F 50 Poll address 0x7E select address 0x7F Protocol Port Serial Cmd lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt Default 0 Options 0 1 0 Main RS 232 on QX 870 Connector A 1 RS 422 485 on QX 870 Connector B External Data Routing Mode Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half Duplex 3 Full Duplex 4 Customized Destination Port Serial Cmd
35. ar Code Click the Utilities button and then the Digital Bar Code tab to display the Digital Bar Code view Click the Digital Bar Code tab and the Start button to view a digitized representation of the symbol in front of the scanner QO tar This routine is indicating bad useful for conveying a sense of the symbol s readability and graphically or unreadable portions of symbols or extraneous noise A green waveform indicates a decoded symbol a red waveform indicates an undecoded symbol or other object The red triangl es represent the width of the scan beam relative to the symbol The upward pointing arrows indicate the symbol s quiet zone Symbol Informatia Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Start Sa Margins T Zoom Out Zoom In Laser Framing Ay H Zoom in Zoom Out Increase the z scroll right or oom level by sliding the Zoom lever to the right It may be necessary to eft to view the symbol s waveform in its entirety ii Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware start N Margins T Symbol Information T Zoom Out oom In Laser Framing A 7 16 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Firmware Click the Utilities button and then the Firmware tab Utilities to display the Firmware view
36. lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Supplemental Type UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Both Options 0 Both 1 2 characters only 2 5 characters only Format UPC E as UPC A UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1
37. 0 Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 161 I O Parameters Service Unit Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Oukpue 3 Parameters 5 162 MurpuE On Oukouek State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Normally Open Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Laser Current High Activates output when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysi
38. 3 Narrow Enhanced Options 0 Standard 1 Narrow 2 Standard Enhanced 3 Narrow Enhanced QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 47 Serial Commands Background Color Serial Cmd lt K451 background color gt Default 0 White Options 1 Black Symbol Ratios Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar nterleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Codabar Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar nterleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Default 1 Standard Options 0 Tight 1 Standard 2 Aggressive Composite Symbology Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 48 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Separator Composite Serial Cmd lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character AIAG Serial Cmd lt K454 status D1 status1 D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 D5a D5b D5c status5 D6 status6 D7 status 7 D8 status8 ID9 status9 D10 status
39. 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 mode EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Code 93 lt K475 mode fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt A 20 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Pharmacode Appendices lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K483 status gt lt K484 status fixed symbol length st
40. 8 Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Ez Mode Autoconnect Switch Model p amp W Find Macros listed on this bar Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro Click on desired y Remove Macro or Edit Macro Macro to run Next Row Read Rate percent Read Rate decodefsec End ReadRate Calibrate Savetonovram Default Scanner Reset For Help press Fi SRESTEOU Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 4 The Terminal interface allows the user to send serial commands to the scanner by using macros by copying and pasting or by typing commands in the Send text field The Terminal also displays symbol data or information from the scanner Right clicking on the Terminal screen displays a menu of additional options 6 2 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows the user to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal For example 1 Type ABC into the Find box P E E Find fasc 2 Press Enter The first instance of ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 6 3 Send Send The Send function allows the user to enter serial commands and then send them to the scanner 1 Type the command into the Send box y3 3 t Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Send lt a
41. B and RS 422 are serial RS 232 A is always enabled RS 232 B and RS 422 can be enabled or disabled to match the physical requirements of the application Ethernet can also be enabled or disabled as required RS 232 A RS 232 B and RS 422 can be configured for Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Decodes Before Output Symbol Position Output etc Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode Command or Data Ethernet can be configured for IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Mode Primary or Secondary TCP Port Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output and External Source Processing Mode QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Application Examples Application Examples The following examples demonstrate how the components described in previous pages can be deployed in industrial applications Daisy Chain Daisy chain configurations are used in applications such as product packaging where single items have multiple symbols For example a box with one symbol on the top and symbols on either side requires at least three scanners to ensure that all symbols will be decoded The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a daisy chain can be arranged One scanner is placed above the conveyor line and one scanner is placed on each side of the line The three scanners essentially function as a single scanner
42. Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information E nabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Diagnostics Oukput E nabled Disabled Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 5 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Note Command processing is always enabled for RS 232 A Data Data enables RS 232 A as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 6 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters RS 232 B The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting R5232 B Enabled Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled
43. Die cast aluminum 1 40in a j 35 6mm DEPTH IP65 rated 35 6mm MIN Operating Temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Storage Temperature 50 to 75 C 63 to 167 F Humidity up to 90 non condensing 63 6mm 63 6mm 3 74in Saan 95mm Emissions Heavy Industrial EN 61000 6 2 2005 Note Nominal dimensions shown Typical tolerances apply Radiated Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted Emissions EN QxX 870 Dimensions 55022 2006 Class A 15 30 MHz Communication Interface Standard Interfaces RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Ethernet Symbologies Standard Offering Code 39 Codabar Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 PDF417 MicroPDF417 Pharmacode UPC GS1 DataBar Applications Standards EAN 128 AIAG Laser Light Type Laser diode Output Wavelength 655 nm nominal LASER RADIATION Operating Life 50 000 hours 25 C DO NOT STARE al al ego LASER PRODUCT Safety Class Visible laser CDRH IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 Class II 655 nm Scanning Parameters Mirror Type Rotating 10 faceted Scan Rate Adjustable from 300 to 1 400 scans per second Scan Width Angle Typically 60 Pitch 50 max Skew 40 max Symbol Contrast 25 min absolute dark to light differential at 655 nm wavelength Raster Mirror Performance 1 10 80 sweeps per second 11 20 60 sweeps per second 21 34 max 40 sweeps per second 35 36
44. Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 31 Serial Commands Diagnostic Output Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode Ethernet TCP Port 2 Serial Cmd lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0
45. End of Read Cycle Disabled Output ak ETH Enabled Qukouk ak Timeout 200 Output at End of Read Cycle Enables or Disables the ability to output data at the end of read cycle External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Dutput at ET meda Output at Timeout Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 33 Communication Output at ETX Determines the output at ETX External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ A Ambles ko Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Mutput at ET Output at Teac PCR NUL SOH STx ET EOT ENG ACK BEL es HT LF VT FF T s0 si DLe oct De2 Dca Ocal NAK SYN ETB an Em sue ESC FS GS AS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Output at Timeout Determines the Timeout value for output External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port RSZ A Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Disabled Qutouk at ETX CR Output at Timeout 0 200 Seconds 5 34 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Array Communication Modes Array Communication Modes Disabled Source AS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID 1 Mode Daisy Chain When set to Daisy Chain follows Microscan Daisy Chain
46. Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits Une ne QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 7 Communication Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Eight Seven Eight Data Bits Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enabled Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 8 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner U
47. IP CIP Interface Object This appendix outlines a rough pseudo code description of how to operate the serial gateway data fields in the QX 870 EtherNet IP CIP interface object Service Code All EtherNet IP CIP data com transactions with the QX 870 both send and receive are performed with Service Code 0x45 Class ID 0x68 Instance 1 Attribute ID Ox6A Each transaction can send data receive data or both Attribute Ox6A has a variable size with a minimum of 16 bytes and the maximum 486 bytes The first 16 bytes are a header with several fields that enable serial gateway style functionality The remainder of the data packet can be 0 to 470 bytes and contains the serial data The usage of these fields and the serial data is described below To send a command to the QX 870 1 Populate the Serial Data field with a serial command 2 Populate the Send Length field with the string length of the serial command 3 If only sending a command and not waiting for a response in the same transaction e Populate the Receive Timeout field with 0 e Populate the Receive Length field with O lf sending a command and waiting for a response in the same transaction e If sending a serial trigger and expecting symbol data output Populate the Receive Timeout with a value equal to the device s read cycle timeout lt K220 timeout gt plus 20 milliseconds If sending a command that requests data like a read of the counters lt T gt lt V gt lt
48. K141 4M gt w HOST_TX ACK A 88 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Setup 4 RES 0x21 T REQ 0x3D STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST _TX lt K100 gt n SCANNER_TX ACK HOST _TX T SCANNER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X HOST_TX ACK SCANNER_TX pi Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK HOST _TX lt K100 gt n SCANNER_TX ACK HOST TX T SCANNER_TX lt K100 8 0 0 1 gt X timeout reached SCANNER_TX timeout reached SCANNER_TX timeout reached SCANNER_TX timeout reached SCANNER_TX T QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices A 89 Protocol Commands Polling Mode Data Flow Examples Setup 1 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x02 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST_TX ACK SCANNER_TX RES Termi
49. K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 3 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 As Soon As Possible Options 0 ASAP 1 End of Read Cycle A 64 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Symbology ID Output Status Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbology i d output status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled AIM Defined ID 2 Readable ID Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Duration Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character No Read Message No Read Message Status Serial Cmd lt K714 No Read message status No Read message gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled No Read Message Serial Cmd lt K714 no read message status No Read message gt Default NOREAD Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Message Status Serial Cmd lt K715 bad symbol message status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bad Symbol Message Serial Cmd lt K715 b
50. KATENE NESER bexcendactaatexses xeceuesneaes 5 43 SVIMDONMOGICS MEE 5 70 VO Parame Ske naa eee eee ee 5 107 MaC 9 6 E Senne ne a ee ee ae ee eee eee 5 168 AGI NO SUNG Se sc eect cetacean ta E hieas ah genta acest E sud aeaea sana uates 5 177 This section explains the function and purpose of the Parameters commands in ESP s tabbed tree controls Important Unless otherwise specified command settings shown in this section are the default settings QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Communication Communication Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the _ tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Communication tab to display the Communication tree control Sy Parameters Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled RS422 Disabled Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled Preamble Disabled Postamble Enabled ie is the default p l To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Communication settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Communication section of Appendix E 5 2 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Ma
51. LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Read Cycle lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration Serial Trigger Character edge trigger filter duration gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 mode number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger Start Character QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual lt K229 start character gt A 19 Serial Commands Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Processing Timeout lt K245 processing timeout gt Motor On Scan Speed lt K500 scan speed gt Motor Off lt K501 motor off gt Maximum Element lt K502 maximum element gt Automatic
52. Laser Off Position and Laser Power Each parameter can be configured using dropdown menus or fields where characters can be entered e Terminal ESP s Terminal allows the user to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the scanner by typing them in the provided field Information about using specific commands in ESP is provided in subsequent sections For ESP system requirements see Minimum System Requirements in Chapter 1 Quick Start QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 1 EZ Mode EZ Mode EZ Mode allows the user to test read rate and calibrate the scanner After connecting to the scanner the EZ Mode view will appear On screen instructions assist the user with positioning testing and calibration Test Click the Test button to start the read rate test for a quick indication of the scanner s read capabilities and the limits of the application When Decodes per Second is unchecked the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans Click Stop to end the test Calibrate The calibration routine that will optimize the scanner by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings ESF ESP Untitled f File Model Options Connect Help G yy Starts Read Rate test 4 4op Mode Auboconnect Switch Model Test Calibrate felled Decodes per Second Welcome to Easy Setup Program 1 Positio
53. Parameters Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Gutpuk Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Gukpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger 0 Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Enabled Low Temperature Disabled Laser Current High Activates output when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits output 2 Parameters Qutpuk On Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Gukpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger j Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Enabled
54. Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The
55. Port 1 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Gukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Gutput External Source Processing Mode QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Enabled 197 168 0100 255 255 0 0 WU U U DHCP 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 5 15 Communication Gateway Enter the Gateway address of the scanner in this field Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 165 0 100 Subnet acc 255 00 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHF TCP Port 1 20i Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TEP Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 16 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual IP Address Mode Determines how the scanner s IP address will be defined Ethernet IP Address Subnet hateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TEF Port 2 Symbol Data Gubpuk Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Static Scanner Parameters Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Enabled Command OOS Enabled Enabled Enable
56. QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters EZ Button Status ARE a Enabled Disabled Enabled Trigger Unlatch Outputs Parameter switch Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ Button does not function Enabled When selected the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Modes command Trigger When selected the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the scanner to start and end read cycles All other button operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout In External As with External Level External Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated Edge by pressing the EZ Button but unlike External Level the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Unlatch Outputs In this configuration the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched Parameter Switch The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power on settings The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the lt Arc gt and lt Arp gt commands consecutively Default on Power On When enabled if the EZ Button is held down on power on the scanner will default to customer defaults and save for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command from ESP s Terminal Default On Power
57. Read only Power on Resets Power on Saves Custom Default Saves oOo e Power On 16 bit counter that increments on scanner power on Used for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients Returns the number of times the scanner has been re powered or a watchdog reset occurs 0 to 65 535 power ons Resets 16 bit counter that increments every time the scanner is reset Value is reset on power on Used for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients Resets include watchdog reset lt A gt lt Z gt lt Zd gt and hardware defaults A watchdog reset is a reset that is forced whenever the software locks up 0 to 65 535 resets Power On Saves 16 bit counter that increments every time a scanner setting is saved for power on Custom Default Saves 16 bit counter that increments every time a scanner setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 177 Diagnostics Hours Since Reset Read only Used as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset Hours Since Reset Read only Hours T Minutes T Hours 16 bit counter that increments every 60 minutes Range 0 to 23 hours Minutes 16 bit counter that increments every 60 seconds Range 0 to 59 minutes 5 17
58. Recenve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 mM F bi Pa Master 5 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data in this field Cancel 7 12 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Request Master Symbol Data Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab 2 Click the Receive Reader s Database button Master Symbal Database Size W KMatchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol After the size of the database is set the scanner can read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number lt Gmaster symbol number gt To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt Gmaster symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 In the Master Database tab 1 Select the master symbol index number in which new symbol data will be stored 2 Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button Master Symbol l Database Size W Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Inde
59. Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Codabar Used in photo finishing and library applications Previously used in medical applications but not typically used in newer medical applications Codabar is a 16 bit character set 0 through 9 and the characters and with start stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths Codabar Enabled Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Start and Stop Output Status Enabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Check Character Type Disabled Check Character Qutpuk Status Disabled Start and Stop Match Status When disabled the scanner will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled the scanner will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Start and Stop Match Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Start and Stop Output Status When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Note Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation Start and Stop Output Status Enabled Disabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster
60. Scanner User s Manual Scanner Setup Laser Off Position Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns off The combined values of Laser On Position and Laser Off Position cannot exceed 100 percent the total arc of one scan Laser Off Position must always exceed the value of Laser On Position for a scan to take place Laser Off E Sestion Laser Off Position Laser On Position Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns on For example if set to 30 the laser will be off during the first 30 percent of the scan When Laser Framing is disabled the laser is on for 100 percent of the full scan Laser Off ii one Laser On Position QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 4 3 Configuration Database Configuration Database Configuration Database settings can also be configured by using the Configuration Database serial commands Calibration Configuration Database ordered Output Output Format Index Gain AGE Mode Tracking Faster Raster Raster Framing Laser On Laser Off Laser Background Top Bottom 5 pez Status Position Position Power Color Current Continuous 1 1 a Sse ales BO Continuous B 60 Continuous a 127 12 10 Disabled 10 95 Low white Fi 60 Continuous a 12 12 10 Disabled 10 95 Low white E 60 Continuous a lei 12 10 Disabled 10 95 Low white J 60 Continuous a 12 12 10 Disabled
61. Scanner User s Manual 1 11 Save Changes in ESP 1 12 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual E 2 Using ESP Contents EZ NOUE eee Re ee ee ee eee ee ee 2 2 API NOOO emerge RE a rene eee eee et ee ae ee ee ee eee E eee 2 3 Kenn OOD AN ee tecoaceseecaecccacsecascecacancetameeceaundens stan uneteaecetesebssesereaspeateceeseceasdaeateeesaneeasmuesgncicscencaucevatas 2 4 Navigaung in E SP aseene aan nE N REE aE AS 2 15 Send Receive Options a cecc cancascccasacecesenccantedan cans sacascevedsnpanaccesnneacaseacentenssisacuncecunceranesaceeceanannce 2 16 This section explains the basic structure and elements of ESP Easy Setup Program When ESP is opened unless otherwise specified in ESP Preferences the EZ Mode view will appear App Mode contains several configuration menus Communication Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Matchcode and Diagnostics a Setup interface a Terminal interface and a Utilities interface ESP can be used to configure the QX 870 in three different ways e Graphic User Interfaces Scanner settings can be configured using such point and click tools as buttons spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions e Tree Controls Each configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that specific area of scanner operation For example the Read Cycle menu shows a Laser Setup command and then a list of the parameters Laser On Off Laser Framing Status Laser On Position
62. Scanner User s Manual 5 79 Symbologies Large Intercharacter Gap When disabled the spaces between characters or the intercharacter gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the scanner will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the scanner will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled OD jsabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 Check Character Type When disabled the scanner will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 the scanner will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW 7 the scanner will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both the scanner will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If t
63. Specifications subject to change Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A labels Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes Warranty One year limited warranty on parts and labor Extended warranty available QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 5 Electrical Specifications Appendix B Electrical Specifications Power Requirement ed eee 10 28VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 270mA at Default Internally tied PWR Use PWR to activate QX 870 Connectors RS 422 485 RxD Output 2 Default Input RS 232 TxD New Master 4 11 ian Common 8 i RS 232 RTS 12 Output 1 kT Ls Ground 7 gt 1 Trigger i l Bee te Sees z RS 422 485 Lf Agee eid Output 3 6 a a TxD RxD a 6 aie i 2 RS 232 CTS J ty s Pe Trigger RS 422 485 2 Power Ground 7 TxD 12 11 Input Common 8 9 RS 232 RxD Input 1 4 3 Terminated Output Common RS 422 485 TxD Connector A Serial Connector B Serial M12 12 pin Plug M12 12 pin Socket RS 422 485 TxD TX e 7 Terminated NIC 4 44 3 N C 2 Power S c 10 N C aa RS 422 485 6 p 2 RxD a DA s n IAR TNG Ground 7 3 Terminated N C 8 9 N C RS Pe RxD Connector B Ethernet Connector P M Serial M12 8 pin Socket M12 12 pin Plug Trigger 4 10 28V 2 Trigger New Master Input 1 Common QX 1 Trigger Connector 4 p
64. Symbol Length Status A DISABLE CURRENT DEFAULT B ENABLE PLEASE PRESS A B TO CHANGE THE PARAMENTER ESC TO CANCEL Another example of a Parameter Options level menu is the Symbol Length shown below In this menu the user is prompted to enter a desired value in a range from 1 to 128 and the menu shows a system default of 10 After a desired value has been entered the user must press Enter to confirm that the value is valid and return to the previous menu or press ESC to return to the previous menu without any change to the parameter The user could also return to the previous menu by pressing Enter when no value has been entered A Symbol Length 10 Rang 1 128 System Default 10 PLEASE TYPE THE NEW VALUE THEN ENTER ESC TO CANCEL NEW VALUE QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 29 Embedded Menus 7 30 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual pendices Contents Appendix A General Specifications ccccccsccccsseeeceeseecceeeeccesaeccesaeceaseeceeeesesseeeceeeeseeueatsnesees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications i cec2 seep sulswces tepcsbesndo haw aaseMicdesedcdeedeocatewes oavidoe lane det cdeuccbenie A 6 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccceccceceeseeceeeceeseececeeeceseeeceeseeeessaeeeeeees A 14 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PinOuts cccccseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeneeeess
65. Symbology P YES Rate Motor Gain Track Value Read Rate 500 500 57 45 99 100 20 MIL Line 2 a 5 6 B 2 BO 21 23 When the Auto Calibration menu is entered or when calibration is beginning all NOVRAM settings that will be calibrated manipulated during the calibration process or configured by the calibration menu are saved to an initial settings buffer e AGC Mode e Gain e Tracking e Motor Speed e Laser On Position e Laser Off Position e Laser Framing Status e Laser Power e Laser On Off Status e Raster Top Offset e Raster Bottom Offset e Raster Status e Raster On Off Status Note Calibration Options and symbology status are not backed up Any changes made to Calibration Options or any new symbologies detected can only be restored by cycling power or sending a Recall command lt Arp gt lt Arc gt lt Zrd gt or lt Zrc gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 23 Other Serial Utility Commands Calibration Progress Indicators The calibration process occurs in five phases Quick Focus Search Pass Focus Pass Medium Pass and Fine Tune Pass The scanner quickly locates the configuration setup defines a calibration range for the parameters and then tunes the parameters for optimal performance During the calibration process the scanner has a number of ways to communicate its progress to the user The following three types of feedback a
66. Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled Quality Output Separator The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Decode Direction Output NUL 30H STZ ETY EDT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF T FE cR sof_s DLE oct DC2 DCa DCa NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB Esc Fs Gs BS us sP Click Delete to remove characters Decodes per Trigger Status When Enabled the scanner enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle with or without a successful symbol decode When the read cycle ends the scanner outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count Quality Qutpuk Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Gutput me Enabled Decode Direction Output When Enabled compares the symbol decode direction to the direction specified in Output Filter Configuration Quality Output Quality Output Separator Decodes Trigger Status Disabled Decode Direction Output Disabled isabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 165 I O Parameters Symbol Position Output Symbol Position Qutput Raster Status Disabled Scan Status Disabled Separator SP Raster Status Scan Status When Enabled the location of the symbol within the sca
67. Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Stop Trigger Stop Character Non Delimited Serial Cmd lt K230 stop character gt Default NULL 0x00 Options Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Processing Timeout Serial Cmd lt K245 processing timeout gt Default 200 0 2 seconds Options 1 to 65535 Scan Speed Serial Cmd lt K500 scan speed gt Default 30 300 scans per second Options 30 to 140 x10 scans per second Maximum Element Serial Cmd lt K502 maximum element gt Default 400 x 0 01 of scan Options 50 to 5000 Automatic Gain Control AGC Level Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 40 QX 870 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 AGC Mode Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 2 Continuous Options 0 Disabled 1 Leading Edge 2 Continuous A 40 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Minimum Gain Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 0 QX 870 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 Maximum Gain Serial Cmd lt K504 AGC level AGC mode minimum gain maximum gain gt Default 255 QX 870 model dependent see Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Options 0 to 255 Symbol Detect Status
68. X gt lt N gt Populate the Receive Timeout with a value of 10 milliseconds or greater Populate the Receive Length field with a value set to the maximum length of data the PLC can handle in one transaction up to 470 If set too small the device will fragment the response over multiple transactions 4 Populate the Receive Request Flags with 0x1 if needed to delete all pending data from the device before it sends a response to the command 5 Initiate the transaction 6 When the transaction is complete check the Receive Length field e If Receive Length is 0 no data has been received QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 105 Operating the Serial Gateway Data Fields in the QX 870 EtherNet IP CIP Interface Object e If Receive Length is non zero then new data has been received Process the Serial Data field up to the value of Receive Length and manage any fragmentation per standard programming technique Check the Receive Response Flags If the value is not 3 then the string sitting in the Serial Data field in not a complete message It is a fragment of a larger message To receive data from the QX 870 1 2 Populate the Send Length field with O Populate the Receive Length field with a value set to the maximum length of data the PLC can handle in one transaction up to 470 If set too small the device will fragment the response over multiple transactions Populate the Receive Timeout field with a valu
69. accuracy on bar ratios If the symbol falls outside this limit it will be rejected Highest The scanner will enforce the highest level of accuracy on bar ratios If the symbol falls outside this limit it will be rejected QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 75 Symbologies Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as symbol truncation A dense contimuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers O through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check character is highly recommended Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Symbol Length 1 10 Symbol Length 2 6 Guard Bar Disabled Range Mode Status Disabled Check Character Status This option is not typically used but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verification An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added Check Character Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled
70. always off Note All green and red LEDs will turn on briefly during power on or reset to confirm that they are functioning PHY Activity If Ethernet is available LNK Solid green when transceiver is linked ACT Blinking green when transceiver detects Tx or Rx activity Otherwise for all RS232 and RS422 485 activity LNK Blinking green with Tx data activity ACT Blinking green with Rx data activity Note Red is never turned on Protocol Activity If EtherNet IP is enabled MOD Module status per EtherNet IP specification NET Network status per EtherNet IP specification Otherwise the MOD and NET LEDs are always off QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 125 I O Parameters Bar Graph Read Rate Auto Calibration Bar Code Configuration and Read Cycle Result all share the Bar Graph 20 100 LEDs Status Indicators PHY Activity EEC F i Rate Good Read NO 1 Disabled oe Read Rate Good Read I O 1 I O 1 always shows the combined state of the discrete outputs If any output is active the I O 1 LED will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate I output Active NO Z2 I O 2 I O 2 always shows the state of the hardware input trigger If the trigger is active I O 2 will be on Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate DOl Qukput Active E i Active Disabled Output Active HPL t fan ct i Wee 5 126 QxX 870 I
71. as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup shows the model menu displaying all supported scanners Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect to the QX 870 prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the scanner s settings into ESP This is not recommended if ESP settings are needed for future use Skip EZ Mode At startup skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Terminal Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced V Show Non Printable Characters Default Format Fast Change Echo Font C Enhanced Format Slower Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Background Color Blue Vv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings OK Cancel Show Non Printable Characters When Show Non Printable Characters is enabled characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting Change Keyboard Macros Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog
72. but they are not synonymous Cordsets enable communications and power between scanners and interface devices Cordsets have an M12 Ultra Lock connector at one or both ends Examples of cordsets are shown below M12 Ultra Lock to Photo Sensor Cordset Cables do not have M12 Ultra Lock connectors at either end An example of a cable is shown below Cable with flying leads QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 3 3 QxX 870 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts QX 870 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts When deploying a network of scanners and interface devices in an industrial setting it is important to use components whose pin assignments are arranged in a way that avoids communication errors and equipment damage This can be achieved with components that are designed in a logical consistent and easy to implement way The QX 870 has a very simple pin assignment methodology The clearly identified connectors at the back of the unit can be used to receive and bus power and also to send and receive data and commands see Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations for information about grounding the scanner correctly QX 870 Base View A is a serial M12 12 pin plug B is a serial M12 12 pin socket or an Ethernet M12 8 pin socket P M is a serial M12 12 pin plug T is a 4 pin Micro Change socket identical to the QX 1 trigger connector Output 2 New Master 4 44 3 Default Output 1 ye T
73. can occur End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the scanner stops expecting symbol information to decode External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from a photo sensor The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Firmware Software hard coded in non volatile memory and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Full Duplex A communication system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices Gain Optimal signal strength Good Read A decode The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a symbol A 108 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Half Duplex A communication system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions but not simultaneously Host A computer PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals Initialize Implement serial configuration commands into the scanner s active memory Input A channel or communication line Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a dev
74. certification notice is correct to the best of Microscan s knowledge at the date of publication This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any ROHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product x QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual E 7 Quick Start Contents Step 1 CHECK Hardware cccccescccsccccecceceecececceeececeececeeceeeececeeeteeetaeeetseeteneeteeeeteneeteeerseeessaness 1 2 Step Z CONNECIAaNe SYSTE eas iecteresas on ctee tes ran its E S tS Gere a a ceceedens 1 3 Step 3 Position Scanner ANd Symbol ccccccccsseccccceseeececcescecceeeecesceegeeeesesseeessuseeeesssaeeeeesas 1 4 Sep 4a AS Bl eaten ae ce moe te eee rn eee ee ee 1 5 AS 5 Bo Fave e210 Modele See ese ea ee eee eee E eee eee 1 6 SOPO CONNEC wastes hates eshte Dace eee paca oe eee suka ast asus onan mace Sadees ee aemeamemes aaeece ane 1 7 DISD SS UROAG ALG oA wine cas a E aa ciadac E 1 10 Siep 6 Configure the Scannere ren eel ore ieee cali a ee rs oh Oeste le 1 11 Step SO Save Chandesin ESP ese i ee eee ee ee 1 12 This section explains how to set up and test the QX 870 quickly using ESP Easy Setup Program Detailed setup information for installing the scanner into an application can be found in subsequent sections 1 1 Check Hardware Step 1 Check Hardwar
75. data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The scanner will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 1 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 91 Symbologies Decode at End of Read Decode at End of Read Disabled i 23 b d Enabled Disabled The scanner will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol whenever the algorithm determines that there are enough error correction code words Enabled The scanner will not attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol until the end of the read cycle 5 92 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters MicroPDF417 Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol Micro POF 417 Disabled Scan Count 65555 Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Scan Count Raster Sweep Count Determines the number of raster sweeps before any in process stacked symbol decode attempt is abandoned Scan Count 65535 1 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabl
76. filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 e Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 e Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 1234C e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1234A or 123BATS e Filter data 12 This will match 1234 1234560 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 e Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 1234C QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 4 7 Ordered Output Ordered Output Filter Settings Ordered Output Filter Settings Ed Filter 1 Criteria Symbalogy Type Any Type n seeli Double clicking on a row in the Ordered Output table brings up the Enter Match String Ordered Output Filter Settings __ dialog Matching String Use these settings to determine Symbology Type Length of the ASCII Lookup CF Addto Match Sting Sane ACC Lookin Wildcard Character Placeholder Character Database Number and Decode Match
77. high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser Current Low Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Low Temperature Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostics Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 71 Serial Commands Output 1 Parameters Output On Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch or No Read 1 Match or Good Read 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Validation 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle 8 Read Cycle Data Valid Output State Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Normally Open Options 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed Pulse Width Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 50 50 ms Options 1 to 65535 in 1 m
78. necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 10 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Symbol Data Output JE nabled Disabled Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Enabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Enabled Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner Diagnostics Oukput Enabled Disabled Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 11 Communication External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables RS 422 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destinat
79. needs symbol data only under certain conditions Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Se Symbol Data Output Good Read When to Output Symbol Data Disabled Match Mismatch Good Read Symbol Data Output Status Disabled It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the scanner to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks When set to Disabled the scanner will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data When set to Match the scanner transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container With Mismatch enabled the scanner transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbo
80. number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 5 72 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters EAN Status When this field is disabled the scanner will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled the scanner can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command If EAN status is required the scanner will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active Output Format In Standard the scanner will not apply special EAN output formatting options In Application the scanner will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN conforming symbols Output Format Standard Standard QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User
81. numbers 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code or FPGA Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part No button 3 Click the Request Part No button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yertication App Code Request Part Mo App Code Request Checksum Request Part Number by Serial Command e When lt gt a request for all product part numbers is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code part number is sent the scanner returns lt a APP_P N gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code part number is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_P N gt e When lt f gt a request for the FPGA code part number is sent the scanner returns lt f FPGA_P N gt 7 18 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Request Checksum Send a request to the scanner for application code boot code or FPGA code checksums 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 Select App Code Boot Code or FPGA Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Checksum button 3 Click the Request Checksum button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right Firmware Yerticatior App Code Reguest Fart Mo App Code Request Checksum Request Checksum by Serial Command e When lt g
82. om ewe powering on scanner Q Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not lt Zrd gt Send lt Zrd gt from Terminal No N default sticky settings Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also lt Zrdall gt Send lt Zrdall gt from Terminal No default sticky settings a When right clicking in a tree control to select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the scanner itself follow up with a Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled in Preferences General tab accessible from the Options dropdown menu Resets Resets A commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power on Power on parameters Z commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the scanner or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset 7 20 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters Saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user essentiall
83. on Enabled Disabled Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 119 I O Parameters EZ Button Modes Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Single Beep Hold down button until a single beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Disabled Three Beeps Read Rate Auto Framing Options RER for Power on uto Framing Laser Framing Load New Master Sleep mode Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when thi
84. protocol Note Daisy Chain can also be autoconfigured by sending the Daisy Chain Autoconfigure serial command Disabled Se 4rray Communication Modes SOUPCE Disabled Daisy Chain ID Status Source Defines the communication port Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrCE R5232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Ageae A Daisy Chain ID 5232 B As4e2 TCP Part 1 TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status When enabled the scanner will append a two character prefix to each scanner in the array This allows the user to identify which scanner sent the data Note Daisy Chain ID will automatically disable Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information and Diagnostics Output for the Source Port Symbol Data Output will be automatically enabled Extra Symbol Information will be automatically enabled and Diagnostics Output will be automatically disabled for the Destination Port Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrce Ro2s2 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID iea Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 35 Communication Daisy Chain ID The Daisy Chain ID is a two character identifier Array Communication Modes Disabled SOUrCE RS232 B Daisy Chain ID Status Disabled Daisy Chain ID Click Delete to remove characters 5 36 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Daisy Chain Autoconfigure For quick setup of a daisy chain co
85. s Manual 5 73 Symbologies Application Record Separator Status When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies Application Record Separator Status Disabled izabled Enabled Application Record Separator Character This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output Application Record Separator Character NUL SOH ST ET EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF cR so si DLE oct Dc2 De3 Dca Nak SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS Gs fs us SP Click Delete to remove characters Application Record Brackets If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output Application Record Brackets Disabled Disabled Enabled Application Record Padding This feature causes the scanner to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Application Record Padding Disabled D i id b E d x Enabled 5 74 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Separation Factor Separation Factor Normal Hormal High Highest Normal No limits are placed on bar ratio accuracy High The scanner will enforce a higher level of
86. stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 0 74 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 89 Symbologies DataBar Limited Note DataBar Limited was previously known as RSS Limited DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser scanners and CCD imagers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot scanners Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional DataBar Limited Disabled Disabled Enabled DataBar Omnidirectional Note DataBar Omnidirectional was previously known as RSS 14 Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where 14 digit EAN item identification may be needed DataBar 14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator DataBar 14 is 96 modules wide It can be stacked in two rows it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height or horizontally if height truncated for small marking Note Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance instead of 2 stacked decode both stacked and non stacked DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DO yjzabled Enabled 5 90 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters PDF417 Used in applications where a large amount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where
87. such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ Button The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the symbol For example try encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a symbol This configures the scanner to enable Serial Trigger Mode to program a new trigger to end the read cycle and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with lt J gt To end all EZ Button functions press the EZ Button once and quickly release QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 27 Embedded Menus Embedded Menus The QX 870 contains Embedded Menus to provide easy configuration in situations where a ESP Software may not be available or applicable The Embedded Menus consist of a Main Menu and a sub menu for every group of commands The following example shows how a user can operate the QX 870 s Embedded Menus Main Menu For the purpose of this example assume the user wants to navigate to the Symbologies menu The user would select C from the list SS SS SSS SS S55 55 5555 MAN MENU 3 3333333333335 S555 A COMMUNICATION B SCANNER SETUP C SYMBOLOGIES D SCANNER I O SETUP E DIAGNOSTICS SETUP F CONFIG IP DATABASE G OUTPUT ORDER FILTER H MATCHCODE gt PLEASE PRESS A H TO EDIT ESC TO EX
88. the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol O A ON Set Master Symbol Loads the next symbol decoded Database Size here into the selected index Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Master Symbol Database Size W Matcheode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index p5 Send Database to Reader ma Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 Master Symbol 5 Receive Reader s Database Saves the database to the scanner Loads the scanner s saved master symbols into ESP I P to Pa Double click a row to enter data into popup text box Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database limited changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted See manual for details 7 10 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Master Symbol Database Size Master Symbol Database Size allows the user to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Master Symbol l Database Size iW Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index s I z Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Header Set Master Symbol Database Size here
89. timeout or new trigger occurs QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 45 Read Cycle Serial Data Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred In Serial Data the scanner accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets as shown here lt n gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data and Edge Serial Data and Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the scanner to the host In this mode the scanner accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edg
90. to 762 mm 0075 191 mm 2 5 to 5 5 64 mm to 140 mm 010 254 mm 1 5 to 7 38 mm to 178 mm Medium Density 015 381 mm 1 5 to 8 5 38 mm to 216 mm 020 508 mm 1 5 to 11 38 mm to 279 mm 030 762 mm 1 to 12 25 mm to 305 mm 0033 084 mm Call Microscan 005 127 mm 4 to 5 102 mm to 127 mm High Density 0075 191 mm 3 5 to 6 75 89 mm to 171 mm 010 254 mm 015 381 mm 3 25 to 8 83 mm to 203 mm 3 25 to 9 83 mm to 229 mm A 4 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual FIS Options Appendices QX 870 FIS 0870 0004G Industrial Raster Scanner Low Density Sweeping Raster Serial FIS 0870 0005G FIS 0870 0006G Industrial Raster Scanner Medium Density Sweeping Raster Serial Industrial Raster Scanner High Density Sweeping Raster Serial FIS 0870 1004G Industrial Raster Scanner Low Density Sweeping Raster Serial Ethernet FIS 0870 1005G Industrial Raster Scanner Medium Density Sweeping Raster Serial Ethernet FIS 0870 1006G Industrial Raster Scanner High Density Sweeping Raster Serial Ethernet Safety Certifications CDRH FCC UL cUL CE CB BSMI FE s CE Q RoHS WEEE Compliant ISO Certification ISO 9001 Certified Issued by T V USA 2010 Microscan Systems Inc All rights reserved
91. to Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Point to Point with RTS CTS A scanner initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted RTS and CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a scanner to initiate data transfers to the host Point to Point with XON XOFF If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop 4S Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Used only with RS 232 This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF ACK NAK See ACK NAK Options Polling Mode see Polling Mode Options 5 22 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Address The Protocol Address can be any number between 1 and 50 Protocol Selection Point to Point Address lt 1 50 Protocol Port R5232
92. to show the tabbed tree control views e Click the Setup button to show the tabbed interface views e Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to send serial commands e Click the Utilities button to access Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences from Default Master Database Digital Bar Code and Firmware For further details see Microscan ESP Help in the dropdown Help menu 1 10 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Quick Start Step 9 Save Changes in ESP To make changes to a configuration setting Parameters ESP Values Communications l R5232 A k een ur R5232 B Enabled down to the setting to be R5422 Disabled a i teat Ba Ethernet Enabled Protocol Selection Point to Point External Data Routing Disabled Array Communication Modes Disabled 1 Left click on the B DEEE Disabled desired parameter and click once in the seat Preamble Characters Et 2 Double click on the Postamble A A Enabled selection box to view 4 Left click again 5 Right click on the open options on the open screen and select Save to screen to complete Reader to implement the the selection command in the scanner Saving Options e Send No Save Changes will be lost when power is re applied to the scanner e Send and Save This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the scanner for power on QxX 870 Industrial Raster
93. 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 16 Options 0 to 128 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character outout symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 6 Options 0 to 128 A 52 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Guard Bar Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length
94. 0 1 Qx 570 COMME IED I Point to Point COMI 115 2K N 8 1 Important The scanner is in Continuous Read Mode by default For best connection results be sure that no decodable symbols are within the scanner s field of view while attempting to connect QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 1 7 Connect cont Step 6 Connect cont Ethernet TCP IP Once the QX 870 is connected incoming symbol data can be displayed in the Terminal as shown below ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help 4 a 9 is 27 EZ Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities 9 amp ld Find v Send zi 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 123456789612 Next Row Master Request Counter Clear Counter Request Next Decode New Master Auto Daisy Chain Auto Discriminate Send Trigger Character Enable Serial Trigger O
95. 1 Parameters Gutput On Mismatch or No Read Gutput State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D L 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 138 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 1 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Mormaly Open Pulse width 59 Oukput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 139 I O Parameters Service Unit Allows the
96. 10 95 Low white 10 60 Continuous a lef lee 10 Disabled 10 95 Low white 5 Number of Active Indexes Load Indes To Current Double clicking on an 5 Number of Database Cycles Load Current To Index Index will bring up the Configuration Database Tine aj ah ade T Settings dialog i 0 Time 10 me J Send Settings Use the Number of Active Indexes field to determine how many database indexes will be used Use the Number of Database Cycles to determine how many times the active indexes will be repeated Use the Switch Timing field to determine the amount of time between active indexes 4 4 Qx 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Setup Configuration Database Settings Double clicking an Index will bring up the Configuration Database Settings dialog for that database index Database 1 Ed Gain AGC Mode Tracking b 0 255 Continuous ol 5 127 Raster Top Raster Bottom Raster Speed i EFi 0 255 12 0 255 10 1 0 200 Framing Status Laser Un Position Laser Off Position Disabled 1 0 10 90 J 15 95 Laser Power Background Color Low White The settings shown above can be Cancel configured differently for every active index Once all active database indexes are configured the index can be concatenated and cycled for the number of times specified in Number of Database Cycles QxX 870 Industrial Raster
97. 100th of the total scan width Laser Setup Laser On Orr Laser Framing Status Laser On Position Laser OFF Position Laser Power Laser Power Allows the user to select the Laser Power setting as follows Low Laser Power 0 6mW Typically only needed for decoding high density symbols located close to the scanner Medium Laser Power 1 0mW Disabled Disabled 10 95 aa 15 55 Medium High Laser Power 1 5mW Typically used for decoding lower density symbols located far from the scanner Laser Setup Laser On CFF Laser Framing Status Laser On Position Laser OFF Position 5 66 Laser Power Disabled Disabled 10 35 Medium Medium High QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Raster Setup Raster Setup allows the user to configure Top Offset Bottom Offset Sweep Rate and Read Cycle On Off Raster Setup Status Disabled Top Offset 127 Bottom Offset lz Sweep Rate 10 Read Cycle On Orr Disabled Top Offset A value of 0 the side opposite the scanner connectors the top of the scanner A value of 255 the side with the connectors the bottom of the scanner If Top Offset is greater than Bottom Offset then Top defines the raster position in a Straight line only If Top is less than Bottom then the raster will sweep back and forth between the Top and Bottom offsets if the sweep rate is greater than 0O The Top Offset i
98. 2 ETX 0x03 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1D REQ Select Unit 1 to receive data SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX STX lt T gt ETX LRC SCANNER_TX 0x1D ACK Unit responds with its address HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 2 Transfer 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC SCANNER_TX ACK HOST_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed A 92 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX LRC HOST_TX Nothing Host should ACK here time
99. 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Range Mode Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Serial Cmd lt K472 status check character status check character output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar status range mode status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge EAN Status Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Supplementals Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Separator Status UPC EAN Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type format UPC E as UPC A gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 53 Serial Commands Separator Character UPC EAN Serial Cmd
100. 3 003 abc 004 sequence on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequence on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequence on mismatch 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced 006 006 007 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 173 Matchcode Sequence Step When the master symbol is sequenced incremented decremented Sequence Step defines the magnitude of change Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card t Seguence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step i 1 32768 New Master Pin Disabled New Master Pin lf Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read starting with Index 1 The Master Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Master Symbol Database Size parameter Mabchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position
101. 3 3 S 115 73 S 20 14 DC4 4 T 116 14 t 21 15 NAK 5 U 117 15 u 22 16 SYN 6 V 118 76 V 23 17 ETB T W 119 TT Ww 24 18 CAN 8 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM 9 Y 121 79 y 26 1A SUB Z 122 TA Z 27 1B ESC 123 7B 28 1C FS 124 7C 29 1D GS 125 7D 30 1E RS A 126 7E 31 1F US 127 TF D A 94 Qx 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix Configuring Ethernet TCP IP When using Ethernet to deploy QX 870s in an application the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel The steps below show how TCP IP settings can be configured 1 From the Windows Start Menu open Control Panel and double click Network Connections amp Control Panel File Edit view Favorites Tools Help wi ra Search gt Folders EJ Address E Control Panel Name Accessibility Options S Add Hardware T Add or Remove Programs QQ Administrative Tools taj Adobe Gamma A Automatic Updates Date and Time a Display Folder Options amp Fonts T Game Controllers i Internet Options amp akeyboard CP mail Mouse nero BurnRights I NVIDIA nview Desktop Manager Phone and Modem Options Power Options Printers and Faxes wt Regional and Language Options Sy Scanners and Cameras E Scheduled Tasks Security Center Dlsoundmax Sounds and Audio Devices g Speech System B Taskba
102. 70 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 55 Read Cycle Reader Setup Reader Setup parameters allow the user to configure Gain Level Tracking and Scan Speed parameters as well as various Automatic Gain Control parameters Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGL Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled Gain Level Gain Level can be used in two different ways depending on the AGC Sampling Mode When AGC Sampling Mode is set to Disabled Gain Level is used as a Fixed Gain The analog signal is amplified by this gain value For Fixed Gain operation changes to gain adjustment setting should be performed in Auto Calibration When AGC Sampling Mode is set to Leading Edge or Continuous Gain Level defines the set point analog signal level The AGC system will attempt to hold the analog signal at this level by automatically raising and lowering the gain as needed Reader Setup Gain Level 40 O 255 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGL Minimum T AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled 5 56 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Tracking Useful in fine tu
103. 710 D11 status11 1D12 status 12 gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Depth of Field Enhance Serial Cmd lt K456 mode gt Default 2 Medium Options 0 Disabled 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Character Output Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 49 Serial Commands Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character o
104. 8 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Laser High When Enabled a Laser High message is transmitted whenever the laser current exceeds a factory calibrated reference value which cannot be altered The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected Alerts the user to impending laser failure Contact Microscan Service Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Laser High message Laser High Status Disabled Meacan Disabled Enabled Message Defines the Laser High message Laser High Status Disabled H I G H L d E F QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 179 Diagnostics Laser Low When Enabled a Laser Low message is transmitted whenever the laser current falls below a factory calibrated reference value which cannot be altered The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected Alerts the user to impending laser failure Contact Microscan Service Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Laser Low message Laser Low Status Disabled Maaa Disabled Enabled Message Defines the Laser Low message Laser Low Status Disabled 5 180 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters High Temperature Threshold A message can be defined that will display when a user defined High Temperature Threshold has been reached The message repeats once
105. A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REQ NUL STs MUL ETH MUL ALK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EGT REQ ENG oT oTa ETs ETs ALK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout 5 LRZ Status Disabled Protocol Port RS 232 A or RS 422 can be used as Protocol Ports Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port AS29324 ACE f MAK Options RES REG MUL STs MUL ETs MLL ALK ALK MAK HAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STs ST ETS ETH ALK ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout D LAZ Status Disabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 23 Communication ACK NAK Options These parameters take effect for ACK NAK on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options The scanner always follows the protocol in both directions to and from the host There is no option to disable it from either direction Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 4 ATK NAK Options RES ALL REQ ALL STS ML ETS ALL ACE ALK MAF MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STX STX ETX ETX ACE ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout J LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset NUL 0x00 REQ Request NUL 0x00 STX Start of Text NUL 0x00 ETX End of Text NUL 0x00 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 5 24 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Man
106. Controller Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 109 Glossary of Terms Programmable Logic Controller PLC An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities Protocol The rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices Read Cycle A programmed period of time or condition during which a scanner will accept symbol input Skew Rotation of a symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Substrate The surface upon which a symbol is printed stamped or etched Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Tilt Rotation of a symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate See the illustration under the definition of Pitch Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle Very Large Scale Integration VLSI The creation of integrated circuits by comb
107. Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 422 Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data A 30 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type Symbol Data Output Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information Ethernet TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0
108. Disabled 1 Command 2 Data EtherNet IP Data Type Symbol Data Output EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data Preamble Preamble Status Serial Cmd lt K141 status oreamble character s gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 32 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Preamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K141 status preamble character s gt Default CR 0x0D Options 1 4 ASCII characters Postamble Postamble Status Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Postamble Characters Serial Cmd lt K142 status
109. EQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC disabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST TX lt K141 gt SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt HOST TX ACK Error Condition Transfer 1 SCANNER_TX symbol data HOST _TX NAK host rejects SCANNER_TX symbol data resend data HOST_TX ACK transaction complete Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt timeout reached timeout reached timeout reached Timeout Reached transaction aborted data is flushed A 86 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Error Condition Transfer 1 HOST_TX SCANNER TX HOST TX SCANNER TX Setup 2 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x00 disabled ETX 0x00 disabled ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt a SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST TX lt K141 gt B SCANNER_TX ACK SCANNER_TX lt K141 0 gt a HOST TX ACK lt k141 0 gt x BAD LRC NAK lt K141 0 gt a GOOD LRC ACK QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices A 87 Protocol Commands Setup 3 RES 0x00 disabled REQ 0x00 disabled STX 0x28 ETX 0x29 ACK 0x06 NAK 0x15 LRC enabled Transfer 1 HOST_TX lt K141 0 gt H SCANNER_TX ACK Transfer 2 HOST_TX lt K141 gt k SCANNER TX ACK SCANNER TX lt
110. ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Symbologies section of Appendix E QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 69 Symbologies Code 39 Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail 1D symbology An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Code 39 Enabled Check Character Status Disabled Check Character Output Status Disabled Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Full ASCII Set Disabled Check Character Status Enables or Disables the check character Check Character Status Disabled izabled Enabled Check Character Output Status Check Character Output Status when added to the symbol provides additional data security When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled Note With Check Character Output Status enabled and an External Edge External Level or Serial Data trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read Message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Large Intercharacter Gap Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of speci
111. Enabled Sequence Step Serial Cmd lt K228 sequence step gt Default 1 Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Index Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options 1 to 32768 Master Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K231 index master symbol data gt Options Any valid ASCII string A 74 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Match Replace Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Mismatch Replace Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 75 Serial Commands Diagnostics High Temperature Threshold lt K402 status message gt Low Temperature Threshold lt K403 status message gt Counts Read only pied returns power on resets power on saves custom default Hours Since Reset Read only lt K407 gt returns hours minutes Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt lt K411 aser high status laser high message laser low status rning M Laser Current Warning Message laser low
112. Ethernet Serial Cmd Default Options IP Address Serial Cmd Default Options Subnet Serial Cmd Default Options Gateway Serial Cmd Default Options Serial Commands 0 Seven 1 Eight lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 192 168 0 100 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP Address Mode Serial Cmd lt K126 status P address subnet gateway IP address mode gt Default 1 DHCP Options 0 Static 1 DHCP Ethernet TCP Ports TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 TCP Port 1 7CP Port 2 gt Default 2001 Options 1024 65535 TCP Port 1 Serial Cmd lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt Default 2003 Options 1024 65535 EtherNet IP Serial Cmd lt K129 status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 28 Appendices RS 232 A Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extr
113. Gain Control lt K504 gain level AGC sampling mode AGC minimum AGC maximum gt Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Raster Framing lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Scan Width Enhance lt K511 status gt AGC Tracking lt K520 tracking gt Laser Setup lt K700 aser on off laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Configuration Database l Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Configuration Database lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Switch Timing Symbologies lt K254 switch mode frame count time gt Quiet Zone lt K450 qguiet zone status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Symbol Ratios lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt lt K454 status D1 status1 D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 AIAG ID5a ID5b ID5c status5 ID6 status6 ID7 status7 ID8 status8 ID9 status9 D10 status10 D11 status11 D12 status12 gt Depth of Field Enhance lt K456 DOF Enhance mode gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code
114. IT Command Menu The user then selects B to navigate to the Code 128 menu SYMBOLOGIES 555555 gt Code Type 77snnesnenannnen Status 753 72 e A CODE 39 ENABLE B CODE 128 DISABLE C CODE I 2 OF 5 DISABLE D CODABAR DISABLE E UPC DISABLE F CODE 93 DISABLE G PHARMA CODE DISABLE H PDF417 DISABLE SSS eae Global Parameters I Quiet Zone Status DISABLE J Symbology Identifier Status DISABLE K Background Color White PLEASE PRESS A K TO EDIT 1 MAIN MENU 2 PREVIOUS MENU ESC TO EXIT 7 28 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Parameter Menu The user then selects B to configure the Fixed Symbol Length Status parameter CODE 128 S S S 353555555 5555555555 A Code 128 Status DISABLE B Fixed Symbol Length Status DISABLE C Symbol Length 10 D EAN 128 Status DISABLE E Output Format Standard F Application Record Separator Status DISABLE G Application Record Separator Character H Application Record Brackets DISABLE I Application Record Padding DISABLE PLEASE PRESS A I TO EDIT 1 MAIN MENU 2 PREVIOUS MENU ESC TO EXIT Parameter Options Menu At this level the current setting and system default are both shown The user can select the desired option and go back to the previous menu or press Enter or ESC to return to the previous menu without any change to the parameter Fixed
115. MICROSCAN QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual MICROSCAN P N 83 000870 Rev C Copyright and Disclaimer fi Copyright 2010 Microscan Systems Inc ISO 9001 Certified Issued by T V USA All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than place a trademark symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty and Terms of Sale For Standard Warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc Renton Headquarters 425 226 5700 800 251 7711 Nashua Office 603 598 8400 Microscan Europe 011 31 172 423360 Microscan Asia Pacific 65 6846 1214 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Int
116. Scanner User s Manual 4 5 Ordered Output Ordered Output Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has settings for the following six parameters Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder Matching Data Decode Direction and Database Number Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Gutput Output Format Filter Number Symbology Type Length Wildcard Placeholder and Matching Data are all displayed in the table below Double clicking on any row of the table will display the Ordered Output Filter Settings dialog where settings can be changed Fiter Symbology Length Wildeard Placeholder Matching Data Decode Database Number Type Direction Number Any Type P Either Any 2 Any Type i T Either Any 3 Any Type U ji P Either Any 4 Any Type T i 7 Either Ary p Any Type U 7 Either Any Receive settings from the scanner Send settings to the scanner or Send and Save settings Number of Filters 5 end A Save Note These buttons only athect this view Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable output filtering to be performed using th
117. Status Laser On Position Laser Off Position and Laser Power Laser Setup Laser On OrF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position 10 Laser OFF Position 35 Laser Power Medium Laser On Off When Enabled the laser is On only during the read cycle When Disabled the laser operates continuously Note A serial trigger or external trigger must be enabled for Laser On Off to take effect Laser Setup Laser OnOrF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position Laser OFF Position 35 Laser Power Medium Laser Framing Status When Enabled the laser will be off for the duration of the Laser Off time beginning from the start of the read cycle and the laser will then be on for the duration of the Laser On time Laser Setup Laser On OFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position Teia Laser OFF Position Enabled Laser Power Medium Laser On Position The duration of Laser Off time Laser On Position is a ratio of the total scan width with increments equal to 1 100th of the total scan width Laser Setup Laser On OFF Disabled Laser Framing Status Disabled Laser On Position 0 10 90 Laser OFF Position 35 Laser Power Medium QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 65 Read Cycle Laser Off Position The duration of Laser On time Laser Off Position is a ratio of the total scan width with increments equal to 1
118. Sting Detnables Direction Click Apply to save the settings to the corresponding filter Wildcard Character E Placeholder Character 2 Database Number Any im Decode Direction Either 4 8 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Setup Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 5 active filters the last position can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Code 39 symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets fi
119. T Match Length 1 Wild Card ij Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Mew Master Pin Disabled Disabled Enabled New Master Load Status The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded where 0 represents idle or no master to be loaded Example f the user has the Master Symbol Database Size set to 1 and then either sends a lt G gt or toggles an active New Master Pin the state will be 1 and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1 the response to lt NEWM gt would be lt NEWM 1 gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared lt NEWM 0 gt 5 174 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Match Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Sig Match Replace Disabled Replacement String iee Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Outputs a user defined data string whenever a m
120. Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or No Read Output State Mismatch or Mo Read Pulse width Good Read Match Output Mode ehh a Rea H Mens Anaal Trend Analysis Diagnostics Diagnostic Warning Quality Output ln Read Cycle l Symbol Position Output Read Cycle Data Valid Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 153 I O Parameters Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read wh
121. Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Low Temperature Mismatch or No Read Normally Open ol Pulse Mo Read O T O Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled E ia b E d x Enabled Activates output when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Humber of Triggers Humber to Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Mismatch or Mo Read Normally Open ot Pulse Mo Read 0 T T Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 141 I O Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output 2 Parameters Oukpur On Output State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number bo Output On Decodes per Trigger Diagnostics High Temperature Service Unit Laser Current High Laser Current Low Low Temperature Mismatch or Wo Read Normally Open ol Pulse Mo Read j j j Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control externa
122. View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration Save to Reader tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Settings Send Current Command This is the same as Send Current View except that it saves only the command that is currently selected Add Exception Remove Exception Advanced Options Send Current View Send Current Command Add Remove Exception After a Receive Reader Settings command is performed1 and the Add Exception option is selected a list of serial commands may appear These are commands that may be in the scanner s firmware but are not included in or are different from the current version of ESP These commands can be edited by double clicking them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to the scanner whenever a Save to Reader command is sent or when an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command is sent Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking in any blank section of a tree control view QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 17 Send Receive Options 2 18 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual E 3 Hardware Integration Contents B50 AALS 1611 8 go Pen e AE E ne we ele rs E ev
123. When set this frame contains the beginning of a new message If both the First frame and Last frame bits are set then this frame contains the whole message If both the First frame and Last frame bits are clear then this frame contains the middle portion of a message Bit 1 Last Frame of Message When set this frame contains the end of a message If both the First frame and Last frame bits are set then this frame contains the whole message If both the First frame and Last frame bits are clear then this frame contains the middle portion of a message Bit 2 Previous Message s Lost The Previous message s lost bit will be set when e The scanner attempts to buffer more than 100 messages or 8000 characters e The next response to Send_with Response includes receive data The scanner is capable of generating data faster than EtherNet IP can request The scanner can buffer a maximum of 100 messages and a total of 8 000 characters If the EtherNet IP master cannot extract data from the scanner fast enough messages will be lost QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 101 Using EtherNet IP Serial Data The Data field contains the serial message characters USINT 8 bit bytes that will be transferred The length of this field should at least equal the amount of data specified in send Length but can be longer to simplify programming All messages sent to th
124. Z Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To cancel Bar Code Configuration quickly press and release the EZ Button QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 121 I O Parameters Three Beeps Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration es Save for Power on Four Beeps j Auto Framing Options Laser Fram
125. a A A 10RS 232 Output 3 6 p i ZAN A Trigger Ground 7 Input Common 8 N RS 232 RxD Output ne A Serial M12 12 pin Plug 2 Power RS 422 485 RxD Input g RS 232 TxD Common 8 RS 232 RTS 1 Trigger Ground 7 Nf SW o RS 232 RxD RS 4221485 o h aa it KS 9 RS 232 CTS PY aT Power RS 4221485 5 Input 1 4 i Terminated RS 422 485 TxD B Serial M12 12 pin Socket 3 4 RS 422 485 TxD NIC 4 A 3 NIC RS 422 485 lt lt TxD ice a HE N va oe N C e T 1 0 RS 422 4856 i R AX 1 N C 2 Power Ground 7 12 N C 8 9NC RS 422 485 RxD P M Serial M12 12 pin Plug 3 Terminated B Ethernet M12 8 pin Socket QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Hardware Installation Grounding the QX 870 Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes git th tee ME le ee a ge SM Se a te at ae o ode ce et Ot le ag ET HERNET f F vim Ter ote thy fen ee BA us Se ee ee en ad Kaa Sha cee ee oO A oe Ht ge ee tats DEVICE F d p DEVIGE s m ats An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the scanner Ground Loops Ground loops signal degr
126. a symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Diagnostic Output RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Command Options 0 Disabled 1 Command 2 Data RS 232 B Data Type Symbol Data Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra Symbol Information RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 29 Serial Commands Diagnostic Output RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Source Processing Mode RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt
127. across multiple scan lines A larger amount of redundancy checking will be applied to qualify the reconstruction result This may require the decode Effort level to be increased This level of redundancy checking is helpful in avoiding misreads Occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread but this setting requires enough matching data to protect the majority of data Note Applications with average area coverage can use this setting High When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to High the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines A very large amount of redundancy checking will be applied to qualify the reconstruction result This will require the effort level to rise to achieve a decode This level of redundancy checking is helpful in avoiding misreads Occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread but this setting requires enough matching data to protect the majority of data Note Applications with a large amount of area coverage can use this setting However as aspect ratio decreases and line speed increases High may not provide enough decodes to be useful The Effort level may also require more time in some cases 5 102 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Reconstruction Effort Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Disabled Effort Mininurn Minimum Maximum Minimum When Symbol Reconstr
128. acter Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Stop trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the scanner looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the scanner remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Mon Delirmited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Won Delimited NUL NUL SOH STX ETX EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT DEEE oct De2 Dca Ocal Nak SYN ETB tan Em sue Esc Fs es Eae Click Delete to remove characters 5 50 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Decodes Before Output Decodes Before Output specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be decoded to qualify as a g
129. ad cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout or a new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Useful in applications in which the timeout duration varies Last Frame or New Trigger Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new object could appear before the last frame in the sequence Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 53 Read Cycle Read Cycle Timeout Read Cycle Timeout determines the duration of the read cycle End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout i O00 Seconds 5 54 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Processing Timeout Useful in higher speed applications with long processing times Processing Timeout 10 65535 1 ms Note If a timeout occurs during processing and no symbols in the field of view have been decoded the result will be a No Read For this reason a longer timeout should be tried to ensure that the symbol is decoded successfully QX 8
130. ad symbol message status message gt Default BAD_SYMBOL Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 65 Serial Commands No Symbol Message No Symbol Message Status Serial Cmd lt K716 no symbol message status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled No Symbol Message Serial Cmd lt K716 no symbol message status message gt Default NO_SYMBOL Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Input 1 Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Reset Counts 2 Unlatch Output Active State Serial Cmd lt K730 status active state gt Default 0 Active Open Options 0 Active Open 1 Active Closed Green Flash LED Green Flash Mode Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch 5 Strobe A 66 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Green Flash Duration Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10 ms increments Status Indicators Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Default 1 PHY Activity Options 0 Disabled 1 PHY Activity 2 Protocol Activity Bar Graph Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Defaul
131. adation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host scanner and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 3 5 QX 870 and QX 1 Connectors and Pinouts Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering POWER 3 TERMINAL POWER RETURN POWER amp EARTH SUPPLY SF Shunt Filtering POWER GUD POWER 2 TERMINAL POWER RETURH SUPPLY EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel CHASSIS GND COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the scanner e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground 3 6 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Hardware Installation QX 1 Interface Device The QX 1 Interface Device s receptacles are physically the same as those o
132. aees A 16 Appendix E Updated Pin Assignment of QX Connector T cecccceecccceeceeeceececeeeeeeeeeceesaeesenes A 17 Appendix F Serial COMMANAS c ccccccsescccceeeceeaeeceeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeceseeeceseeecesseecessueeeeseeeessaneeesees A 19 Appendix G Protocol COMMANGS cccccecccceseececeeeeeceeececeeeeeseeeceeseecesseuceeseeeessueesseeeeeseneeessaes A 85 Appendix H ASCII Table ccccccccccccseccceseececeeeeecseeeeeeeeceeseeeeeseaeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeeeseusessegeeeseneeesaas A 94 Appendix Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccccccsseeceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesseaseeessaees A 95 Appendix J Using EtherNet IP cc cccccccccccccceececeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeceseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseneeesees A 98 Appendix K Operating EtherNet IP Serial Gateway Data FieldS cccccccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees A 105 Appendix L Interface Standards ccccccccccccseccceeeeeecaeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeseeseeeessaeeeseaeeesseeeeseeeeees A 107 Appendix M Glossary Of Terms cccccceeeccceseeecececesenceseaeceseeaceeseaeesseaaeessaeeessaeeesseeessegeeess A 108 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 4 59 109 mm Width 3 74 95 mm a Depth 1 76 45 mm 2X M4x0 7 Weight 16 oz 453 g eee Environmental A 4 29in 3X M4x0 7 fz rt 108 8mm on 7mm Enclosure
133. al Data and Edge trigger mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to function 5 48 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Start Character Non Delimited Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Non delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event When defining Start trigger characters the following rules apply e In External Edge the scanner looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any Stop trigger character that may be defined e In External Level the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the scanner remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received e In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Serial Trigger Character Delimited La FP Stark Character Hon Delimited Stop Character Mon Delimited z FE sE a m E C l ekg Bekk alg eg aE BEBE sa BE ig Click Delete to remove characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 49 Read Cycle Stop Char
134. ance by rejecting noise and correctly recognizing the bars of the candidate symbol Transition Counter Transition Counter is an integral part of the AGC system Transition Counter determines the number of black bars that will be counted before an AGC sample is taken Setting a Transition Counter value lower than the default of 14 gives the scanner less integration time for the candidate symbol and makes the scanner more susceptible to false objects A Transition Counter value greater than 14 requires more bars to be present for the symbol even to qualify as an object When setting the Transition Counter value it is important to keep in mind what occurs when the symbol is first presented to the scanner before gain is applied to the symbol A few bars are usually missed due to distortion at first Setting Transition Counter to the same value as the number of bars contained in the symbol can cause the scanner not to take an AGC sample at all The value of 14 is optimal except in the case of low bar count due to e Symbols that are tilted so that only 10 bars or fewer are available in a single scan line See Symbol Reconstruction e Symbologies with typically low bar counts such as Pharmacode Applications using symbols with fewer than 10 bars should use Fixed Gain operation 5 64 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Laser Setup Laser Setup allows the user to configure Laser On Off Laser Framing
135. and data is sent from the primary scanner to the host or PLC Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanners in the daisy chain lt ie To Power i Supply Qx 1 or PLC r E vat Er a SE Tna O gt D W ep ME Co m r _ HI TL J T ua To Power Supply z q To Power A QX 1 g i I E E Supply psi AR Host or PLC 3 10 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Hardware Installation Multidrop Multidrop networks are used in applications where it is necessary to decode symbols at multiple locations within an industrial process Scanners are placed at stations located between manufacturing steps and data from those scanners is directed to a multidrop concentrator before being sent to a host An example of this type of application is food packaging in which part number data is collected and tracked throughout the packaging process The highlighted areas below demonstrate how a multidrop network can be arranged gt tl Power Supply axl Host a or PLC Qx 1 To gt L CI gt D gt oxn i is aai To Power Supply To Power i QX 1 Multidrop Supply Concentrator Host or PLC QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 3 11 Application Examples Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP Ethernet TCP IP is the standard Ether
136. art Character lt K229 start character gt Serial Trigger Stop Character lt K230 stop character gt Processing Timeout Scan Speed lt K245 processing timeout gt lt K500 scan speed gt Maximum Element lt K502 maximum element gt Automatic Gain Control lt K504 gain level AGC sampling mode AGC minimum AGC maximum gt Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter lt K505 symbol detect status transition counter gt Raster Framing lt K506 status top offset bottom offset sweep rate read cycle on off gt Scan Width Enhance lt K511 status gt AGC Tracking lt K520 tracking gt Laser Setup lt K700 aser on off laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Trigger Mode Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Trigger Mode Serial Cmd Default 0 Continuous Read Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and Edge Leading Edge Trigger Filter lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Cmd Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us Trailing Edge Trigger Filter lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter trailing edge trigger filter gt Serial Cmd Default 313 10 ms Options 1 to 65535 x 32 0 us A 38
137. aster Scanner User s Manual Ix Statement of ROHS Compliance Statement of ROHS Compliance All Microscan readers with a G suffix in the FIS number are ROHS Compliant All compliant readers were converted prior to March 1 2007 All standard accessories in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog are ROHS Compliant except 20 500013 01 and 98 000039 02 These products meet all the requirements of the European Parliament and the Council of the European Union for ROHS compliance In accordance with the latest requirements our ROoHS compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca BDE Perfluorooctanes PFOS or Perfluorooctanoic Acid PFOA compounds above the maximum trace levels To view the documents stating these requirements please visit http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri CELEX 32002L0095 EN HTML and http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2006 372 0032 0034 EN PDF Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of Microscan s ROHS Compliant products This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which Microscan believes to be reliable and from random sample testing however the information is provided without any representation of warranty expressed or implied regarding accuracy or correctness Microscan does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances The information provided in this
138. ate display e Configure RS 232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application and click Connect Baud 115 2K Z IP Address 162 148 88 5 Parity Non Stop Bits One m Data Bits Eight bd Port COM1 Aux Port In Use e RS 232 C RS 232 Ethernet Ethernet TCP Port 1 2001 a Click the Search button to locate __Seach fl scanners on the network Force Connect Auto Connect Cancel Cancel RS 232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible 2 12 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Autoconnect e If the RS 232 connection attempt fails use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the scanner and the host Connecting Select the COM Port com Fress Skart to autoconnect se Select the COM Fort COM COM Other G Autoconnect e If the communication port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change the port Connecting Select the COM Part com J600 N 7 1 e Once the correct port is chosen click Start to connect Stop e When a connection is established the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 13 Menu T
139. ate the 5 beep response Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ContralfHex Output mee Enabled 5 116 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Control Hex Output Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown as M Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHex Gukpuk Control Control Hex QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 117 I O Parameters EZ Button MICROSCAN a Hel E 2 NET UK A Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ Button status EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration Three Beeps Save For Power on Four Beeps Auto Framing E Auto Framing Options fee Laser Framing Enabled The EZ Button has four positions Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps and Four Beeps selectable by the length of time the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight EZ Button Modes 5 118
140. atus fixed symbol length gt MicroPDF417 lt K485 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Symbol Reconstruction lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt I O Parameters Calibration Options lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Beeper lt K702 status gt Quality Output lt K704 quality output separator decodes per trigger status decode direction output gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output symbol data symbology identifier status gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt No Read Message lt K714 status message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 status message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 status message gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Green Flash LED lt K750 green flash mode unused green flash duration gt Status Indicators lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 O 2 gt Symbol Position Output lt K758 raster position output status scan position output status separator gt Database Identifier Output lt K759 status separator character gt EZ Button EZ Button Modes Auto Framing Options Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis O
141. aximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance 40 40 a0 Continuous j 255 a 0 255 Disabled 14 400 Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 59 Read Cycle Symbol Detect Status When Symbol Detect Status is enabled Bad Symbol No Symbol is output depending on whether or not there were enough transition counts rather than based on a simple No Read Note Symbol detection can only be used when AGC Sampling Mode is set to Disabled Fixed Gain Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Sain Control 407 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum 0 AGC Maximum 255 Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan Width Enhance Transition Counter Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Number of bar space transitions required for an AGC sample When multiple samples take place within a scan the largest value is used lf symbol detection is enabled the transition counter defines the minimum number of transitions required for a scan to qualify as a No Symbol number of transitions lt transition counter or Bad Symbol number of transitions gt or transition counter and no decode Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Gain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum T AGC Maximum ints Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter
142. be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character Then the data is displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Separator Status Disabled izabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 83 Symbologies Separator Character As required by the application Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command from ESP s Terminal will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Separator Character OO f NUL SOH STX ETx EOT Eng ACK BEL es HT LE f vT FF cR _so _s1
143. ble Echo j Change Background Color F Mon Printable Characters Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or other text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a Save As dialog Change Font of text in Terminal brings up a Font dialog aE Echo Font to change typed text brings up a Font ialog Enable Echo enables Echo text typed by user Change Background Color of Terminal window Non Printable Characters allows the user to hide non printable characters or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format e Default Settings returns all the above settings to default Default Settings keyboard Macros Keyboard Macros allows the user to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys F2 F4 F5 etc Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text Save Current Text Send File Find Next and Find Previous functions as well as the same functions defined above Terminal Capture Text Save Current Text Change Font Change Echo Font Disable Echo Change Background Color Mon Printable Characters Default Settings Find Nex F3 e Capture Text allows the user to append data in real time to a text file While in operation the text file cannot be opened Pause interrupts the capture flow and Stop ends the flow and opens the file e Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal
144. bled Mode of Operation Source Port data will echo back to itself Source Port data will always pass through even when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Whenever ETX is received on the Source Port or symbol data is generated the data will be send to the Destination Port with its data appearing between the Preamble and symbol data Source Port data will always be sent to the Destination Port with a Preamble and Postamble Symbol data will be sent to the Source Port on a good read without Preamble or Postamble in Point to Point protocol even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host Destination Port data always echoes to the Source Port even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode Hal Other il Devices A ee External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Ambles needed Preamble needed O 5 30 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Half Duplex Mode When Half Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Enabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Enabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be us
145. brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Normal Options 0 Normal 1 High 2 Highest Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Options 0 Disabled 1 Standard 2 Edge to Edge 3 Both Standard and Edge to Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 56 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Symbol Length Code 93 Serial Cmd lt K475 status fixed symbol length status symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Raster Sweep Count Serial Cmd lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 65535 Options 1 to 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 SerialCmd lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length un
146. cation scenarios QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 25 Communication Polling Mode Options These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt on the main RS 232 or RS 422 ports not on the Auxiliary Port and are completely independent of the ACK NAK Options lt K147 gt The values of protocol characters can be changed but the protocol events cannot be disabled The polling mode address is configured in the lt K140 gt command To enable true multidrop protocol the RS422 485 port must be enabled lt K102 1 gt in order to turn the transmitter on and off If RS 232 is enabled instead of RS422 485 lt K102 0 gt then Polling Mode will operate as a Point to Point polling protocol This is because the RS 232 transmitter is always left on when enabled Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix E for sample Polling Mode communication scenarios Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RS232 A ATK l NAK Options RES MLL REQ MUL STs MUL ETH MUL ALK ALK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES ET REC ENG ST STs ET ETH ALE ALK MAK MAK Response Timeout z LEC Status Disabled RES NAK Defaults RES Reset EOT 0x04 REQ Request ENQ 0x05 STX Start of Text STX 0x02 ETX End of Text ETX 0x03 ACK Acknowledge ACK 0x06 NAK Negative Acknowledge NAK 0x15 5 26 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Res
147. cially when extraneous non symbol objects in the field of view appear to be symbols AGC can only base its measurements on one object If that object is not the actual symbol AGC performance and consistency are adversely affected Leading Edge bases its calculations on the first object it detects even if the first object is not a symbol This is helpful if the symbol is always at the leading edge of the decode direction Continuous is the recommended setting for Microscan scanners Continuous always samples throughout the entire scan but is most interested in the object with the most sharply defined bars This can occasionally mislead the scanner when bar like objects or specular reflection enter the field of view Fixed Gain is preferable if AGC repeatedly fails to choose the correct Gain Level setting for the application In some applications symbols might be surrounded by a greater number of symbol like false candidates than actual symbols The Fixed Gain setting will never change its value so once it is set surrounding objects in the field of view will not distract the scanner from decoding actual symbols Fixed Gain is also useful in applications using symbols that have very low bar counts or in applications using Symbol Reconstruction on symbols with tilted or skewed placement The AGC Minimum and AGC Maximum parameters are useful in applications with depth of field limitations that are not conducive to Fixed Gain operation To deter
148. cuit A 12 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices QX 1 Connectors Connector T on the QX 1 Interface Device is the Trigger connector Connectors 1 2 and 3 can be used to bus power and data as required by the application The connectors on the QX 1 interface device physically mirror those on the QX 870 scanner but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 connectors take on the communications and power roles that are assigned to them Trigger 4 by 10 28V _ 10 28V Trigger New Master Input 1 Common Ground Trigger 2 Trigger New Master Input 1 Common QX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket A OQ N Power Switch Trigger Switch COMM I 0 r TRIGGER QX 1 Wiring Diagram Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin schprocket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed The simple diagram above also shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device Power can be bussed between scanners and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Tri
149. d Symbol Length 2 E 128 Guard Bar Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place Useful when Interleaved 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols A guard bar is a heavy bar at least twice the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Disabled izabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 77 Symbologies Range Mode Status Important Unless Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length must be set to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required When Range Mode is disabled the scanner checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range Range Mode Status Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 78 QX 870 Industrial Raster
150. d Command In Static Mode the scanner uses the user defined IP address entered in ESP DHCP In DHCP Mode the scanner automatically acquires the IP address Subnet and Gateway addresses from a DHCP or BOOTP server QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 17 Communication TCP Port 1 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the scanner The default setting is 2001 Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 165 0 100 Subnet Zoo 255 0 0 Gateway 1 0 0 0 IF Address Mode DHCP STCP Port 1 200 H 1024 65535 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TCP Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 1 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from sourc
151. d Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary cont Warning Label Placement These labels are located on the QX 870 Compact Industrial Scanner MC RSs Cart FY ME on 7 Bn E L Bui Bee On Side ITEE EENES Gs EIM ENF EN Er mP FER MEM DPEN EEE ME WARTE TE IEE PHLLENA E i on irs I mwiri menre EAL On Back viii QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Introduction Statement of Agency Compliance FE The QX 870 has been tested for compliance with FCC Federal Communications Commission regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements this device must not be co located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE The QX 870 has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the following requirements Heavy Industrial EN 61000 6 2 2005 Radiated Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 30 1000 MHz Conducted Emissions EN 55022 2006 Class A 15 30 MHz The QX 870 has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions QX 870 Industrial R
152. d Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 2 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width s00 Oukput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read a a Mumber to Output On Ho Read Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 147 I O Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Norma
153. d Transition Counter Gain The QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner is an optical device Optical devices deal with a wide range of brightness in a way similar to a camera If the image is too bright the exposure must be reduced If the image is too dark the exposure must be increased The scanner will only work properly if it is within the range of brightness that can resolve light and dark changes or transitions in the field of view If the gain is too low the entire symbol looks like a dark bar to the scanner If the gain is too high the entire symbol looks like a white bar to the scanner Brightness conditions can be affected by the distance between the symbol and scanner or by the consistency of the material on which the symbol is printed The AGC Sampling Mode command has two primary functions AGC either Leading Edge or Continuous and Disabled Fixed Gain AGC Leading Edge or Continuous AGC self adjusts the optical electrical gain to hold brightness to one range for all materials and distances The Auto Calibration menu shows what AGC is doing to control brightness as in the example shown here scan Motor cain Track AE Rate set Set Thrsh Level Read Rate 500 500 65 45 35 0 1005 0089305467640 The value 35 0 indicates that brightness has been reduced by 35 dB The symbol used in this example was very close to the scanner using high laser power As the laser power is lowered and or t
154. d color gt Default 88 Options 0 to 255 Raster Bottom Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 167 Options 0 to 255 Raster Speed Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 10 Options 0 to 80 Framing Status Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser On Position Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 10 Options 10 to 90 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 45 Serial Commands Laser Off Position Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 95 Options 15 to 95 Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background co
155. d is enabled Output 2 Parameters Gukput Gr Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On O Decodes per Trigger 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 149 I O Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers T Number to Output On T Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled 5 150 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Service Unit Scanner
156. d which port behaves as the Aux Port e Only one daisy chain setup required per system e Minimal configuration required for each port with similar items grouped together QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 3 Communication RS 232 A The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 232 formatting RSZ 4 Baud Rate 115 2 Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Mone Hone Odd Stop Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Stop Bits 5 4 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Data Bits Only changed if necessary to match host setting One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Data Bits Eight Eight Symbol
157. defaults read rate requests device control options and scanner status requests see Serial Utility Commands Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt EtherNet IP lt K129 status gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt EtherNet IP Data Type lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt
158. depth of field Low Minimal additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The Low setting is not recommended for most applications that require Depth of Field Enhance However some focus and printing issues may make this the optimal setting Medium Some additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The Medium setting is the most likely to be useful in applications that require Depth of Field Enhance High Additional processing of elements is performed to extend depth of field The High setting is not recommended for most applications that require Depth of Field Enhance However some focus and printing issues may make this the optimal setting 5 100 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Reconstruction Industrial environments present many data capture challenges some of which are damaged symbols partially covered symbols poorly printed symbols and variation of label placement Symbol quality location and orientation cannot always be controlled Labels can be torn partially obscured overprinted or underprinted due to variations in print mechanisms For industrial tracking and traceability to be reliable symbols must be decoded regardless of damage label tilt or any other discontinuities The QX 870 features X Mode technology which allows the scanner to reconstruct data from damaged or poorly positioned symbols by stepping t
159. dth s00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers D 0 255 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Mo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers D Number bo Qutpuk On D 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 137 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the scanner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output
160. e Item Description Part Number 1 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner FIS 0870 XXXXG 2 QX 1 Interface Device 98 000103 0 3 QX Cordset Common M12 12 pin Plug to M12 12 pin Socket 1m 61 000162 01 4 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Plug to DB9 1 m 61 000152 01 5 QX Cordset Host Serial M12 12 pin Socket to DB9 1 m 61 000153 01 6 QX Power Supply M12 12 pin Socket 1 3 m 97 000003 01 7 QX Cordset Host Ethernet M12 8 pin Plug to RJ45 1 m 61 000160 01 8 QX Photo Sensor M12 4 pin Plug NPN Dark On 2 m 99 000020 02 Note Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the Microscan Product Pricing Catalog Important This product is intended to be supplied by a Listed power supply marked Class 2 or LPS and rated from 10 to 28 VDC 9 0 Watts Note The QX 870 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the scanner itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanners in the daisy chain 1 Standalone with QX 1 Standalone without QX 1 Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the s
161. e 93 Both Standard or Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled the scanner will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled the scanner will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DO jsabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 128 5 86 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Pharmacode Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999 999 In binary format each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros Pharmacode Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Minimum Bars 4 Bar Width Status Mixed Direction Forward Fixed Threshold Value 400 Important When Pharmacode is enabled other linear symbologies will not decode properly Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length a
162. e EIP master are kept as coherent as possible given the constraints of maximum message size The following rules apply for each data frame sent to the master e Preamble and postamble strings are attached to the message per lt K141 gt and lt K142 gt configuration e One message is sent for every receive transaction Even if more than one message will fit into the Receive Length specified only one message will be sent e If the entire message fits within the Receive Length specified then the whole message will be sent in one transaction e If a message is larger than the specified Receive Length then the message will be fragmented and sent over multiple receive requests In response to the first request the beginning of the message is sent Subsequent responses will send the middle portions of the message until the end of the message is reached To assist de fragmentation of the message process the Receive Response Flags and enable pre and post amble strings Input T gt O Assembly Object Class 0x04 Instance 0x64 The Assembly Object is not implemented On Allen Bradley PLCs select Inhibit Module to disable I O connections Output O gt T Assembly Object Class 0x04 Instance 0x65 The Assembly Object is not implemented On Allen Bradley PLCs select Inhibit Module to disable I O connections Configuration Assembly Object The Assembly Object is not implemented On Allen Bradley PLCs select Inhibit Module
163. e Senet cess E R emanate cies aaae 4 10 This section describes ESP s four Setup interfaces Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output and Output Format Each interface allows the user to make changes to scanner configuration quickly and easily QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 4 1 Calibration Calibration The settings in the Calibration interface can also be configured using the lt gt and lt CAL gt serial commands and the Calibration Options command The Test and Calibrate features Top Offset Bottom Offset Sweep and other raster functions are also available in EZ Mode can be set using the fields below and top and bottom offset can also be set by clicking and dragging the edges of the laser Y 7 arc in the picture Fixed Parameter Calibration Test Calibrate Framing Select Scan Speed M Decodes per Second Raster Framing xl 500 W Fixed Raster Frame Eel 20 0 F Static Line okna wj iea C Rasteing ag TEE aiba A Laser Power ki i Medium M Fixed Bottom Offset 255 pn Z Raster Options ER Laser Frame a W Symbology Detect Save Stop o Eom e ee ese Scan Speed Gain Click Save to save calibration Tra king Laser settings or Stop to cancel the Power and Raster calibration process Options can also be configured in the Reader Setup command 4 2 QX 870 Industrial Raster
164. e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is always sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is not sent to the Source Port e Destination port data is echoed to the source port in an un polled mode Scanner External Data System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed Custom Mode Custom allows for user defined communication Ambles to Source Echo to Source Output at End of Read Cycle Output at ETX Output at Timeout 5 32 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Destination Port Determines the port to which data will be sent External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS232 AR Ambles to Source iI A Echo to Source AS2s2 B Output at End of Read Cycle Andee Output at ETY i aah l Mutouk ab Timeout FtheretelP Ambles to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send Preambles and Postambles to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS23532 4 Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Mutou at ETX Mutpuer at Timeout 2 U0 Echo to Source Enables or Disables the ability to send an Echo to the Source port External Data Routing Disabled Destination Port AS s2 A Ambles to Source Disabled Echo to Source Disabled Output at
165. e a 7 10 Digital BarCode xtc yeti a a 7 16 RIANA O coe oriad eee d ouaaced aioe acids ards poe ssestda tee ete doen a 7 17 DefaulURESClU Save snce tt A ee eek 7 20 scanner Status REQUESIS sase neee icteric 7 22 Other Serial Utility COMMANAS ccccssseceecceeseeeceeeeeeeeseueeeeeseeeeeees 7 23 Embedded Men Sisancssnsser a a ose Seed ae ete eel ove 7 28 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications ccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications ccccccceeeceeseeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees A 6 Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations cccccceeeeeeeeeees A 14 Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset PInOUts cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes A 16 Appendix E Updated Pin Assignment of QX Connector T 06 A 17 Appendix F Serial COMMANGS cccccceeccceeceeseeeeceaeeeeeaeeseaeeesaneees A 19 Appendix G Protocol Commands ccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaneees A 85 Appendix H ASCII Table cc ccccccccccccceecceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeceeseeeeesaaeeesanaees A 94 Appendix Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cccccecccecseseeeeeeeeeeeeesaaees A 95 Appendix J Using EtherNet IP cc cccccccececesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaneees A 98 Appendix K Operating EtherNet IP Serial Gateway Data Fields A 105 Appendix L Interface Standards cccccccccsecccceeeceeceeeeseeeeessaeeeeenes A 107 Appendix M Gl
166. e a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcode e To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send the settings to the scanner and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important To use Differences from Default connect to the scanner and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Master Database Master Database Click the Utilities button and then the Master Database tab Utilities to display the Master Database view Important The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card both of which use Master Database Index 1 Master Database Overview Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisymbol setup for matching and other Matchcode operations Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands 1 Click the Master Database tab Enable Matchcode Type Set the Master Symbol Database Size Select the database index in which the master symbol will be entered Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into the index b Click
167. e between two devices such as for example the scanner and host It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 unlike RS 232 measures signals deferentially that is the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive or transmit wires rather than the potential between signal and ground As a result cables if shielded can be up to 4000 feet 1219m in length Like RS 232 RS 422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground It can be used wherever RS 232 is used Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP TCP IP and EtherNet IP protocols are supported over Ethernet A 6 byte hardware address is used which is divided into a 3 byte vendor ID and a 3 byte vendor defined field Ethernet enabled device manufacturers are assigned a unique vendor ID and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 107 Glossary of Terms Appendix M Glossary
168. e data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 18 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters TCP Port 2 One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the scanner The default setting is 2003 Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet foo 2c 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TCP Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Gukpuk Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Se TCF Port 2 2003 1024 65535 Symbol Data Oukput Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Symbol Data Output Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 2 as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the dest
169. e filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 5 then filter indexes 1 2 3 4 and 5 will be applied 4 6 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Setup Filter Number This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position Symbology Type Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Length Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Wildcard This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Placeholder The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Matching Data This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to
170. e or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the scanner will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 0 010048 Seconds Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed 5 46 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Trailing Edge Used to ignore accidental triggers when Trigger Mode is set to External Edge or External Level To consider a change in state on the trigger input the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration In an edge mode the scanner will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration In a level mode the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 0 010048 lt Seconds External Trigger State Active Closed External Trigger State Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their applica
171. e symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range The scanner sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting the scanner may take longer than the timeout to process symbol data Trigger ma C E Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read Leading Edge Continuous Read 1 Output Trailing Edge External Level External Edge Seral Data Seral Data and Edge External Trigger State Note When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 43 Read Cycle Continuous Read 1 Output Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand In Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the scanner sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the
172. e that the PLC is willing to wait for the transaction to complete When receiving bar code data this would typically be set to the read cycle timeout lt K220 timeout gt plus 20 milliseconds or so When checking for a command response set this to at least 10 milliseconds Populate the Receive Request Flags with 0x1 if needed to delete all pending data from the device and only respond with data generated by the device after this request is received Initiate the transaction When the transaction is complete check the Receive Length field e If Receive Length is 0 no data has been received e If Receive Length is non zero then new data has been received Process the Serial Data field up to the value of Receive Length and manage any fragmentation per standard programming technique Check the Receive Response Flags If the value is not 3 then the string sitting in the Serial Data field in not a complete message It is a fragment of a larger message A 106 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix L Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers In the QX 870 selection of interface is made by pin assignment and in the case of host communication by software switching between RS 232 and RS 422 RS 485 RS 232 RS 232 defines an interfac
173. ecoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 131 I O Parameters Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle Read Cycle Data Valid Activates discrete output when all the data generated in the read cycle has left the scanner 5 132 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 1 Parameters Gutpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Output Stabe Mormally Oper Pulse Width Normale Oper Outp
174. ed the scanner will reject any MicroPDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled DESI Cm Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The scanner will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Fixed Symbol Length 0 1 366 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 93 Symbologies Composite When set to Enabled or Required will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be DataBar 14 DataBar Expanded DataBar Limited EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Composite Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator Enabled lf Composite is set to Enabled the scanner will decode both the 2D composite and linear components However if the 2D composite component is not decoded the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle Required If set to Required the scanner must decode both components or a No Read will occur Separator Status Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Separates the linear and the composite component
175. ed if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode e Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received e Source Port data is sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble e Symbol data is sent to the Source Port and the Destination Port at the same time and conforms to the communication parameters e Destination Port data is echoed to the Source Port in an un polled mode Scanner Other Devices le j k External Data 5System Data 4 Destination Data Unpolled mode Ambles needed QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 31 Communication Full Duplex Mode When Full Duplex Mode is enabled the following conditions apply Symbol Data to Source Fixed to Disabled Ambles to Source Fixed to Disabled Echo to Source Fixed to Disabled Output at End of Read Cycle Fixed to Disabled Output at ETX Fixed to Disabled with user defined characters Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Output at Timeout Fixed to Disabled with user defined timeout Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled Mode of Operation e Source Port data is not echoed back to itself e Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode
176. ee CO RE re TP ee ree ere 3 2 COS OS arash nA a ec Ah ace cle Serna a dec cee an cea eaten ae se meer 3 3 QX 870 and QX 1 Connectors and PiINOUtS 0 ccc cccc cece eee eseeeseeseeeeeeseeseueeeeeaueeaseneueaeenaeens 3 4 POWer and TMOGEr SWITCHING veces cesciretarets en coccen recent o E E ax 3 8 gt OWES OCIA ssa Ania tee cea vase tae oe anima aipetavcea a cca cians fie scen face ramet dame a a 3 9 PAD OIC ATION EXI MPIO S ase secant e a a a an sansa seen E NETA 3 10 This section introduces the details of QX 870 hardware and explains how that hardware can be integrated in an application 3 1 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Connectors Connectors Industrial cabling and connectivity schemes must be able to withstand environmental extremes of heat cold and moisture and be secure enough not to be disconnected or damaged inadvertently in the course of day to day operation The current industry standard for connectivity is a sealed circular connector such as the M12 The International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard for M12 connectors describes them as fixed and free screw locking connectors This type of connector is widely available off the shelf from manufacturers such as Turck Lumberg Phoenix Contact Molex or Binder The QX 870 uses sealed circular connectors with Ultra Lock technology Ultra Lock connectors are more resistant to harsh industrial conditions and are easy to connect Ultra L
177. en Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle Read Cycle Data Valid Activates discrete output when all the data generated in the read cycle has left the scanner 5 154 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 3 Parameters Dukput On Mismatch Output State Normally Uper Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 3 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch Output Stabe Hormally Open Pulse width 0 500 Seconds Output Mode Pulse QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanne
178. enabled the scanner will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only UPCIE AN Both Standard or Edge EAN Status Enabled Supplementals Status Disabled Separator Status Disabled Separator Character P Supplementals Type Both UPC E as UPC 4 Disabled EAN Status EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European retail applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the scanner will read UPC Version A UPC Version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired disable EAN EAN Status Enabled Disabled Enabled Note The extra character identifies the country of origin 5 82 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Supplementals Status Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the scanner reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Supplementals Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the scanner will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded the main will
179. encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the scanner can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Full ASCII Set Disabled l 23 b E d x Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 71 Symbologies Code 128 Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high security requirements A very dense alphanumeric symbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge Code 128 Both Standard or Edge Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 EAM Status Enabled Oukput Format Standard Application Record Separator Status Disabled Application Record Separator Chara Application Record Brackets Disabled Application Record Padding Disabled Separation Factor Mormal Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted This specifies the exact
180. ening the scanner voids the Microscan Systems Inc warranty and could expose the user to laser diode power of up to 7mW The laser beam can be harmful to eyesight Avoid eye contact with the laser beam Never point the beam at other people or in a direction where people may be passing fr LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT 695 nm 1 75 mW IEC 60825 1 1993 A1 1997 A2 2001 vi QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Introduction Warning and Caution Summary cont AVOID EXPOSURE CAUTION CLASS LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM PROGUCT COMPLIES WITH H CPR 1040 90 AND 100 11 EXCEPT FOR DE VATIONS PERSUANT TO LASER MOTICE HO 80 TED JUNE 24 2007 e Wavelength 655 nm e Beam Divergence 0 4 typ e Pulse Duration 40 186us e Maximum Power 1 75mW e Location of the QX 870 s laser aperture MICROSCAN Laser Aperture CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure IMPORTANT The QX 870 is intended for connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class 2 and rated 5 VDC at 3 5 Watts or greater if using electrical accessories European models must use a similarly rated Class 1 or Class 2 power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual vii Warning an
181. ents Ue Ce Ca Ue Ga 4 My Computer 1394 Connection Local Area Connection Local Area Connection 2 Local Area Connection 3 Wireless Network Connection Details Network Connections System Folder A 95 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 3 The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear To check the host computer s connection settings click Details on the Support tab To verify connection status _ Local Area Connection Status General Support Connection status ZAN Address Type Assigned by DHCP IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 On the Support tab click the Details button to bring up a list of Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 Property Value Windows did not detect problems with this connection If you cannot connect click Repair Physical Address 00 0C F1 EC 61 D5 IP Address 162 148 88 35 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 162 148 26 1 DHCP Server 162 148 25 71 Lease Obtained 1123 2008 10 53 03 AM Lease Expires 2 1 2009 10 53 03 4M DNS Servers 162 148 25 71 162 148 25 70 198 6 1 3 WINS Server 4 A connected QX 870 s default address information can be verified in ESP by clicking the Search button in the Connection Wizard Compare the scanner s IP address to the host s IP address to determine wh
182. er 3 Bad Symbol 4 No Symbol Trigger Evaluation Period Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 69 Serial Commands Number to Output On Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Decodes per Trigger Threshold Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 Trend Analysis Output 2 Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Trend Analysis Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt A 70 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Diagnostics Output 1 High Temperature Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Unit Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser Current High Serial Cmd lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current
183. es Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 Resolution Seconds EBcor d a QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 183 Diagnostics User Defined Name User Defined Name allows the user to enter any combination of ASCII characters to identify the scanner User Defined Mame T ka 5 T 0 5 184 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual es 6 ferminal Contents Temminal VINO OW fc oateeseaceocts cassaect aan are sti apsste seams eed pastas Ee oe cea tiecunaensteseest 6 2 FIN see ectes ene E E esi deae nee eaiae tise asada ute stun a adene cae aniasacanentuaueeasseaneres 6 3 Sa srs sce a cece ses eae ie ste ns acs cig E EAEE E EE E O E ES TT 6 4 ETE pa SAE E na ne ee oe ee ee eee eer 6 5 Terminal Window Me NnuS ccccccccceceececeeseeceeeeseeeeeeeseuseueeeeeeeeeesaeeaueusaeeeeeeeeeeeeaueaeseeeeseneauaneaeenees 6 6 This section describes the multiple functions of ESP s Terminal interface QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 6 1 Terminal Window Terminal Window _ Terminal Click this button to display the Terminal view Copy paste save Type text here to Terminal Type serial find matching text screen commands in the Terminal here window Clear screen ESP ESP Untitled Seles File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Sa 9 3 2 amp
184. esponds to the EIP master scanner the Receive Timeout indi cates the number of ms that passed from the time the request was received to the when the response is sent Caution The time frame defined by this serial interface object field must be less than the unconnected message timeout Caution If the Receive Flag Clear Before Receive is used see Receive Flags for proper operation Receive Request Flags The Receive Request Flags field gives the host additional controls over the serial input Bit 0 LSB Description 0 Clear Before Receive Clear the serial input queue before receiving new incoming data 1 7 Reserved Flushing the input queue allows the EIP master to remove irrelevant data that was collected by the scanner Caution If the Clear Before Receive bit is used with a receive timeout of zero 0 the scanner will respond with an Object State Conflict error When using the Clear Before Receive bit always specify a non zero timeout so the device will have a chance to generate a response to any commands in the data field A 100 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Receive Response Flags The Receive Response Flags field gives the host additional information about the serial input Bit 0 LSB Description 0 First frame of message 1 Last frame of message 2 Previous message s lost 3 7 Reserved Bit 0 First Frame of Message
185. ess and release the EZ Button 5 122 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Four Beeps Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Two Beeps Calibration Three Beeps Save For Power on Auto Framing Auto Framing Options i Laser Framing Save for Power on Auto Framing Load New Master Sleep mode Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Mas
186. ether or not they are in the same subnet range this can be determined by your I T department if you are unsure IP ddres 162 148 88 IP Address 192 168 0 100 O RS 232 C RS 232 Ethernet TCP Part 2001 z Ethernet TCP Port 1 2001 H 00 0B 43 05 F4 D4 MODEL Qx 830 DESCRIPTION QX 830 for SQE APP 35 336301 10 eee EIPVID 1095 Q 830 192 168 0 1 Conce A 96 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Configuring Ethernet TCP IP cont 5 To change the host computer s connection settings click Properties on the General tab To change TCP IP settings On the General tab click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog double click Internet Protocol TCP IP Local Area Connection Status Connection Status E Broadcom 440x 10 100 integrated Duration Speed 100 0 Mbps This connection uses the following items JM File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks A JB Q0S Packet Scheduler M Intemet Protocol TCP IP i Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected V Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Internet Protocol TCP IP Pr
187. ettings lt Zrdall gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also default sticky settings Reset Will not save for power on lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 83 Serial Commands lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters Default Reset S ine eid lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Default Parameters lt K gt All Status Request All Descriptor Status Request All Range Status Request Scanner Status yg Knnn gt Singe Status Request Request Commands Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request lt Knnnd gt Default Customer Parameter lt CAL gt Calibrate without Menu Other Serial Utility Commands lt gt Calibrate with Menu lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration A 84 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix G Protocol Commands Communication Protocol Command Table Control Characters Mnemonic denac on menu Aaa a Walle elfectot Command RES D 04 Reset REQ E 05 Request EOT D 04 Reset STX B 02 Start of Text ETX C 03 End of Text ACK eF 06 Acknowledge NAK U 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF S 13 Stop Transmission QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 85 Protocol Commands ACK NAK Data Flow Examples Setup 1 RES 0x00 disabled R
188. every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature in the environment around the scanner Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its temperature specification Also since hotter environments tend to shorten the life of electronics components a user may want to set the temperature threshold closer to the nominal temperature of 25 F A user can set a temperature value that when exceeded will cause a high temperature message to be displayed If High Temperature Threshold is set to zero the warning message is disabled Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the High Temperature Threshold High Temperature Threshold Status Disabled Message Disabled Enabled Message The user can enter a message of up to 10 characters that will be displayed whenever High Temperature Threshold is exceeded High Temperature Threshold Status Disahled H I E H T E iH F QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 181 Diagnostics Low Temperature Threshold A message can be defined that will display when a user set Low Temperature Threshold has been reached The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected This value is a reference to the external ambient temperature in the environment around the scanner Helps ensure that the scanner is being used within its temperature specification The user can set a low temperat
189. fault 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Separator Character Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default Comma Options Any 7 bit ASCII character QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 55 Serial Commands Application Record Brackets Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Application Record Padding Code 128 EAN 128 Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separation Factor Serial Cmd lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN 128 status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record
190. fication When enabled the scanner can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width Large Intercharacter Gap Disabled Disabled Enabled Important Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone enabled because a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow quiet zone 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap 5 70 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Dizabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start and stop and check character characters The scanner ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length Fixed Symbol Length i 0 1 125 Full ASCII Set Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39
191. for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communication However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help For connection to a UL listed direct plug in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to 28 VDC at 5 watts or greater European models must use a similarly rated Class or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950 Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light radiation exposure There are no user serviceable parts in the scanner Op
192. gainst the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled i ig b l E d x Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the scanner to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol Fixed Symbol Length 1 128 Minimum Bars Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Minimum Bars 4 4 15 Note The minimum allowed bar count is 4 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 87 Symbologies Bar Width Status If set to Mixed the scanner will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the scanner is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars Bar Width Status Fised Threshold Direction Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read Direction Formard Forward Revere Fixed Threshold Value Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar Fixed Threshold Value 1 65535 5 88 QxX 870 Industria
193. gger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 13 Ground and Shield Considerations Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety noise reduction and the protection of equipment from voltage transients Buildings including any steelwork all circuits and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes Sie tagt ae Ue Oe Ga OR oe ae ee te SG Gee a ems ao i Meg OE SR NES PG E THERNET A F i 4 me aeo Se sec ge a a nee A ae oer the we om g a a de ae w CCE a oy a a DENICE S o ssa so Re ee Ta f oh a amp ONE Bk WH aad Ea be aw S WG So a be a he oo ar SUPPLY o a Sa ae I Beer se es eee ee ee Oe amp ee a a RS232 422 485 OO E E S O i aa ee ed Se DEVICE ss A ee le ee ee ee ne Oe De og ae ee A ee ee ee RS232 427 485 oe 4 PH Ee heed se te amp 4 aes oo ES ee Pf etme Lt 0 r ey ele Oe ee er ee ee eee ee we A mo ate oT MACHINE oa oaa MACHINE o An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the scanner Ground Loops Ground loops signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host scanner and the
194. gt 2 Press Enter 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send the command additional times 6 4 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro yt Mumber Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning 7 Exit Read Cycle For Help press F1 Click on the first arrow here to see Add Click on Next Macro or Default Macros Click on subsequent Row to see the When macros are defaulted the entire arrows to edit macros next row of macro set is restored to the original macros macro commands Click a macro button to execute it in the Terminal If the macro is a command it is sent to the scanner at the same time that it is displayed Editing a Macro Click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit to display the following dialog Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Value C p gt Cancel Edit the macro value or type a new Macro Name in the text field provided and define it in the Macro Value field Click OK to save the entry QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 6 5 Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font j Ena
195. h 1 Wild Card g Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Hew Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH The indicates Se Mismatch Replace Disabled ka ma ie SENING is the default Replacement String pe To open nested options To change a setting double click single click the the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Matchcode section of Appendix E QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 167 Matchcode Overview of Matchcode Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the scanner s memory compare that data against other symbol data and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols however if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol Steps fo
196. h Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched Active State Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Active pen Active Closed Active Open Input function is activated when input state is de energized Active Closed Input function is activated when input state is energized 5 130 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output On Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory QOukpuk 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or No Read Gutput State Mismatch or Wo Aead Pulse width Good Read Match Output Mode Mismatch iene analyse see cae Diagnostics Diagnostic Warming Output 2 Parameters In Read Cycle Output 3 Parameters Read Cycle Data Valid Disabled Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been d
197. h compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 0 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 5 8 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode This method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Ratio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Standard Aqgressive Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 8 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 6 1 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode This method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 105 I O Parameters I O Paramete
198. h of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Timeout ends the read cycle causing the scanner to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output Symbol Data is set to End of Read Cycle lf in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger 5 52 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters New Trigger New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the scanner at irregular intervals not timing dependent New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next re
199. he read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger command is enabled Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger D 0 65535 Example Decodes per Trigger threshold 100 100 or more decodes No output Fewer than 100 decodes Output fires 5 160 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Diagnostics Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Diagnostics tree When Diagnostic Warning is enabled the Output On configuration has no effect The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions High Temperature Activates output when the temperature exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Gutput State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Decodes per Trigger
200. he symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded Check Character Type Disabled Dizabled Mod 16 M T Both 5 80 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Check Character Output Status When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled the scanner will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled the scanner will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Check Character Output Status Disabled izabled Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 81 Symbologies UPC EAN Used primarily in point of sale applications in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan scanners in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental data following the normal symbol The UPC Version A UPC A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum character When
201. he symbol is moved farther from the scanner the attenuation brightness reduction value becomes lower The user does nothing to adjust the gain in order to keep the scanner decoding AGC performs the task of raising gain to accommodate the greater distance The actual attenuation factor is determined by the return light from the symbol and the SETPOINT value that the control system is attempting to hold SETPOINT is an abstracted number range that has to do with the feedback system s dynamic range A very low SETPOINT value of 0 20 would tend to keep the symbol amplitude low A very high SETPOINT value of 150 255 would tend to keep the symbol amplitude high The gain will change to hold the feedback value equal to the user SETPOINT setting of amplitude Gain Level at all times Disabled Fixed Gain Fixed Gain is a gain mode in which there are no changes in the gain system The system takes the total gain range and divides it into 255 steps Then the value of the Gain Level setting is converted directly into the gain value Nothing will change this value unless the user changes the Gain Level setting 5 62 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters When To Use Fixed Gain vs AGC The AGC settings Leading Edge or Continuous are preferable for most applications as they provide the best overall scannable area However there are times when AGC will have difficulty locking onto the symbol of interest espe
202. his example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 157 I O Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Bad Symbol or No Symbol that will activate the output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output Skate Mormally Open Pulse width S00 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers Number to Qutpuk On No Bead Decodes per Trigger Decodes per Trigger Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Decodes per Trigger Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window
203. hough the elements bars in multiple stages and then combining the successfully decoded regions into completed symbol data output as shown in the simplified example below Note Symbol Reconstruction functions with Code 39 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 and LLL my Scan Line 1 Scan Line 14 AA 123456 7 8 9 10 1112 1314 Segments 1 m 2 3 mm 4 m8 6 5 mm ne 6 nel 7 mes 8 oo E 9 E m E 10 m E 11 E n 12 E n 13 E E 14 E Result mm m n mm mmm mm QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 101 Symbologies Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Disabled ai Disabled Low Medium High Disabled When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is Disabled the scanner will not attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines Low When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to Low the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines Only the minimum amount of redundancy checking will be applied to qualify the reconstruction result This can limit the Effort level required to decode However this is the lowest level of proof required so occasionally the symbol s level of data integrity may lead to a misread Note Applications with low area coverage may be forced to use this setting Medium When Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy is set to Medium the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols
204. ial numbers Wild Card Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Note If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Sequential Matching Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Makchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Increment Match Length Wild Card t Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 Mew Master Pin Disabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 169 Matchcode Match Start Position Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison For example ifa symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but only the part number information is needed set the scanner to sort only the part number and to ignore the other characters Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential For example if Match Start Position is set to 3 the first 2 characte
205. ice Ladder Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel LED See Light Emitting Diode Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current Multidrop A communication protocol for networking two or more scanners or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Noise The same as static in a phone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the symbol data being decoded and transmitted by the scanner Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Output A channel or communication line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pitch Rotation of a symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the substrate See the illustration below Skew D lt we Tilt Symbol yy on Scanner PLC See Programmable Logic
206. iet Zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Quiet Zone is Enabled and set to Narrow or Narrow Enhanced Quiet Zone Narrow Enhanced Standard Marrow Standard Enhanced Narow Enhanced Note Do not use Narrow or Narrow Enhanced when Large Intercharacter Gap is enabled for Code 39 unless Symbol Reconstruction is also enabled Note Any Quiet Zone setting other than Standard will increase processing requirements Standard The scanner locates symbols using a standard 8x Quiet Zone requirement Narrow The scanner locates symbols using a 5x Quiet Zone requirement Standard Enhanced The scanner locates symbols using an enhanced algorithm for standard 8x Quiet Zones The enhanced algorithm has a higher tolerance for leading edge noise and is particularly useful for high density symbols Narrow Enhanced The scanner locates symbols using an enhanced algorithm for 5x Quiet Zones The enhanced algorithm has a higher tolerance for leading edge noise and is particularly useful for high density symbols This setting is the Default because it overcomes many symbol quality issues such as printing and placement inconsistencies 5 96 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbology Identifier Symbology Identifier is a standard prefix set of characters that iden
207. ifferences from Default Click the Utilities button and then the Differences tab Utilities to display the Differences from Default view Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Click this button for a list of ESP configuration settings that are different than default settings Click Generate Barcode to display the Bar Code Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing the required configuration commands lt K2003 gt skee 502 tkrh 25 lt K810 5 gt lt F 611 13 lt K81 2 25 Save As Send and Save Send to Reader Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Differences from Default Generate a Code Mode External Edge Read Cycle Timeout 50 Code 128 Edge to Edge Output On No Read Output On Good Read M atch Output On Mismatch Send configuration settings to the scanner without saving by clicking Send to Reader Click Save As to save the report as plain text or a tab delimited text file Send configuration settings to the scanner and save in ESP by clicking Send and Save e To creat
208. igger Start of read cycle End of read cycle i Read cycle duration Host This is when host activates trigger expects output 5 108 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters No Read Message Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host Mo Read Message Enabled Message MORE AD No Read Message Status Disabled Only symbol data is output after a read cycle Enabled When the scanner is in a triggered mode a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character No Read Message Foahled Message NORE AD QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 109 I O Parameters Bad Symbol Message Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if a qualified symbol is present but not decodable Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enab
209. ility to find Microscan products on the network configure their ip address then configure all application parameters EtherNet IP Terms of Use EtherNet IP Technology is governed by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA Any person or entity that makes and sells products that implement EtherNet IP Technology must agree to the Terms of Usage Agreement issued by ODVA See www odva org for details Object Model The EIP has the following features e Supports Explicit Messaging UCMM and Class 3 connection access to serial communication data e Serial master command response handling with one request e Packing parameters available in each read request Device Type The EtherNet IP device type is 0x00 Generic Device Vendor ID Microscan s Vendor ID is 1095 A 98 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Service Object Summary Service Code Class ID Instance ID Attribute ID Description 0x45 104 0x68 1 106 Ox6A Serial Interface Get with Response EtherNet IP Serial Interface Class 0x68 Data is sent and received through the Serial Interface using explicit messaging Send Get and Receive are from the EIP master scanner perspective That is Send is data transferred from the EIP master to the scanner Get and Receive is data transferred from the scanner to the EIP master The host should issue a vendor specific service Send_w
210. illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read Mismatch Same as Match except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch 5 114 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Green Flash Duration Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred When a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value Output Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good Read Green Flash Duration 100 Seconds Beeper On Good Read Beeper An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read Note The beeper will also sound at any of the following times e When the scanner is defaulted e When a Send and Save command is sent from ESP e At the conclusion of an Auto Calibration procedure e When a lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zrd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent from ESP s Terminal Output Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good Read Green Flash Duration 100 On Good Read Disabled On Good Read On Mo Read QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 115 I O Parameters Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status Disabled ControlfHes Qubpuk Con
211. in Socket A 6 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Optoisolated Outputs The reader has optoisolated outputs that can transfer signals from the reader to peripherals Outputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system because the output common is shared by all outputs NPN Output for Host Input Host Reader Gy i WU Input Cl ii V Output 2 E ii Wy Input a Input QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 7 Electrical Specifications NPN Output for External Load Reader Output 1 A 8 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices PNP Output for Host Input Host Reader m Output 1 T T ji T Input gt i ii ii T gt Input T gt Input QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 9 Electrical Specifications PNP Output for External Load Reader A 10 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Optoisolated Inputs All discrete inputs are optoisolated Inputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system because the input common is shared by all inputs NPN Source NPN Reader Trigger ary E Input 1 o o CLC Input Common CLC Current Limiting Circuit QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 11 Electrical Specifications PNP Source PNP Reader CLC Current Limiting Cir
212. ination port to the source port QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 19 Communication EtherNet IP Enables or disables EtherNet IP operation in the scanner Important See Appendix H Using EtherNet IP for detailed information about implementing EtherNet IP in an application Ethernet Enabled IP Address 192 166 0 100 Subnet 255 205 010 fateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TEF Fort 1 2001 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TEF Fort 2 2003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command Sp EtherMet IF Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Symbol Data Output Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Command Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the scanner Extra Symbol Information Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the scanner Diagnostics Output Enables or disables diagnostics output from the scanner External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables EtherNet IP as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port
213. ing Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the EZ Button Calibration Calibration is initiated when the associated button position is selected To cancel Calibration quickly press and release the EZ Button Save for Power On All scanner settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending a lt Z gt from ESP s Terminal Auto Framing Auto Framing is initiated when this button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly pr
214. ining thousands of transistor based circuits on a single chip VLSI See Very Large Scale Integration A 110 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual
215. initialize symbology detection array with current 0O A ON 12 13 14 15 16 17 If laser framing is enabled set scan line to full symbology status configuration enable all symbologies except PDF417 and Pharmacode symbology detection continues to operate concurrently with all remaining calibration processes Set LEDs to display 20 LED on all others off Pre position the raster As ls no change Straight set raster straight out Search or Frame sweep the raster through full sweep angle If a symbol is found place raster in the middle of the symbol If no symbol is found set raster straight out Set LEDs to display 40 LED on all others off Perform one pass of symbology detection 100 scans are decoded 10 11 Perform motor and laser calibration if enabled If motor speed calibration is enabled motor speed starts at 300 sps and is increased by 50 sps until 500 sps After 500 sps motor speed is increased by 100 sps until 1 000 sps Motor speed calibration is limited to a maximum of 1000 sps or motor speed is not changed If laser power calibration is enabled at each motor speed increment laser power is cycled between low medium and high power settings or laser power is not changed If video calibration is enabled and AGC is enabled not in Fixed Gain operation several gain and tracking pairs are used at each motor speed and laser power combination or video settings are unchanged
216. inters and fax printers and helps you add new ones Customize settings for the display of languages numbers times and dates Add remove and configure scanners and cameras Schedule computer tasks to run automatically View your current security status and access important settings SoundMAX Control Panel Change the sound scheme for your computer or configure the settings for your speakers and recording devices Change settings for text to speech and for speech recognition if installed See information about your computer system and change settings For hardware performance and automatic updates Customize the Start Menu and the taskbar such as the types of items to be displayed and how they should appear Change user account settings and passwords for people who share this computer Configure the Windows Firewall Set up or add to a wireless network for your home or office Connects to other computers networks and the Internet 2 The Network Connections dialog will appear Double click the icon for the Local Area Connection being used in the application s Network Connections DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qx gt B JO Search j Folders Fiz Address Network Connections Network Tasks a Create a new connection Change Windows Firewall settings See Also 4 Network Troubleshooter LAN or High Speed Internet Other Places gt Control Panel cy oor 2 A A A F B My Docum
217. ion port to the source port 5 12 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Ethernet Status Enables or disables Ethernet connectivity in the scanner Scanner Parameters Important For further information about setting up TCP IP with a PC see Appendix G Configuring Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IF Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Gukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Qukput Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Enabled 192 166 0 100 eco on U0 0 0 0 0 DHP 001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command UUs Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Qx 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 13 Communication IP Address Enter the IP address of the scanner in this field Ethernet Foahled Subnet 255 255 00 ateway 0 0 0 0 IP Address Mode DHCP TEF Port 1 O01 Symbol Data Gukpuk Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Output Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command TEF Port 2 z003 Symbol Data Output Enabled Extra Symbol Information Enabled Diagnostics Oukput Enabled External Source Processing Mode Command 5 14 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Subnet Scanner Parameters Enter the Subnet address of the scanner in this field Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP
218. ios will decode most symbols Aggressive ratios will not validate the entire symbol before decoding The ratios are loosened to read poor quality symbols This setting is not recommended unless users understand the potential ramifications character substitution rate may increase dramatically when Symbol Ratio Mode is set to Aggressive Symbol Ratio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Code 39 Symbol Fatio Mode Standard Codabar Interleaved of 5 Standard Aqgrmessve Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security A Validate Bars function minimizes the acceptance of skewed symbols Standard Maximum ratio is set to 4 0 1 A Validate function which compares the ratio between the maximum and minimum bars in the symbol is used for additional security Aggressive Maximum ratio is set at 5 5 1 A Validate function is not used in this mode This method may be useful on long symbols where the spot velocity can change throughout the symbol and effect the minimum and maximum bar values 5 104 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Codabar Symbol Ratio Mode Code 39 Standard Codabar Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard Aggressive Tight Maximum ratio is set to 3 6 1 A Validate function whic
219. ir power supplies are connected to a common earth ground A 14 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation SCANNER INTERFACE In Line Filtering SF Shunt Filtering 3 TERMINAL POWER SUPPLY POWER RETURH EARTH POWER s a POWER GHD s 2 TERMIHAL POWER SUPPLY POWER RETURH EARTH local to power source connected to RETURN at main power panel COMM SGHLS SIGHAL GHD IF CONDUCTIVE MOUNTING BRACKET IS GROUNDED TO EARTH POTENTIAL THEN POTENTIAL MUST BE SAME AS EARTH AT POWER SOURCE MOUNTING BRACKET Notes e Ensure that mounting bracket Earth is at the same potential as power source Earth e Supply Return and Earth ground must be stable low impedance reference points e 2 Terminal Power Supply must still provide an Earth connection to the scanner e Signal Ground can be used for communications and or discrete signal ground reference It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 15 Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts Microscan offers two flying leads cordsets 61 000166 01 and 61 000167 01 for use in QX hardware configurations The diagrams below show the correspondence of wire colors to pins 61 000166 01 QX Cordset
220. is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port 5 20 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Protocol Selection In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communication standards Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the scanner and the host or in the case of Multidrop between the scanners and a concentrator Note In all protocol modes the Preamble and Postamble character strings can be used to frame the decoded data and both are included in calculating the LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocal Port RS232 A ACK f MAK Options RES MUL REC NUL STA MUL ETK MUL ACK ACK MAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENQ STA STX ETX ETH ACK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout a LEZ Status Disabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 21 Communication Protocol Options S Protocol Selection Point to Point Address Point to Point Protocal Port Point to Point with ATSZCTS Point to Point with SOM s OFF Point to Point with ATS CTS and SON S0FF ACK NAF Polling Mode Point to Point Standard Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Standard Point
221. ismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled Se Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String Disabled Enabled Replacement String User defined data string that when enabled replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MI SMATCH QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 175 Diagnostics Diagnostics Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display 52 the tree control tabs 4pp Mode Then click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics tree control 7 Parameters l Communication Read Cycle Symbologies O Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Diagnostics Counts Read only Hours Since Reset Read only Laser High Laser Low High Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Service Message Ue A Siak Disabled is the default Service Message Treshel i a eo eos P Resolution Seconds User Defined Mame Om 830 To open nested options To change a setting double click single click the the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Matchcode settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Diagnostics section of Appendix E 5 176 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Counts Read only Counts
222. ith Response 0x45 to vendor specific Object Class 104 0x68 Instance 1 Attribute 106 Ox6A This service includes a 16 byte header that specifies parameters for control of the serial interface Attribute ID dec Access Name _ Data Type Description Send with Serial we Response Interface eer UINT send length 0 470 UINT Receive length 0 470 UINT Receive timeout ms USINT 3 Reserved USINT Receive Request Flags USINT Receive Response Flags USINT 5 Reserved USINT 10 470 Serial Data UINT unsigned 16 integer USINT unsigned 8 bit integer All UINTs are sent little endian with the least significant byte or USINT sent first followed by the most significant byte QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 99 Using EtherNet IP Send Length This parameter specifies the length of the data sent from the EIP master scanner to the scanner The maximum number of bytes that can be sent in one message is 470 bytes Receive Length This parameter specifies the largest amount of receive data the EIP master scanner host can accept from the scanner The maximum number of bytes that can be received in one message is 470 bytes Receive Timeout This parameter specifies the longest amount of time in milliseconds ms the EIP master scanner host is willing to wait for a new message A value of 0 is used for an immediate timeout When the scanner r
223. ition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value 5 156 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 3 Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 3 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 3 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In t
224. ixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Direction Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Forward Options 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 400 Options 1 to 65535 A 58 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices GS71 DataBar RSS DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Limited RSS Limited Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length DataBar Expanded Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 14 Options 1 to 74 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 59 Serial Commands MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status
225. ject moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Negative or Positive that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and the falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object This applies both to External Level and External Edge External Edge Initiate Read Cycle p i a Object 1 moving in front of the detector beam causes a change in A the trigger state which initiates the Object A read cycle detector Initiate Second Read Cycle Object 2 moving in front of the detector beam causes another a atl 1 m change in the trigger state This sig nal initiates a new read cycle and Object ends the previous read cycle unless detector T Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or read cycle timeouts are consistent External Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on the End of Read Cycle Mode setting a
226. l Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Good Read Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified With Good Read enabled the scanner transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 107 I O Parameters When to Output Symbol Data This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host Symbol Data Output When to Output Symbol Data lAs Soon As Possible T 5 oor fan Prozsible End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new tr
227. l Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters GS1 DataBar Note GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as Reduced Space Symbology or RSS DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled DataBar Expanded Note DataBar Expanded was previously known as RSS Expanded Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Where appropriate use 1 non stacked for better performance over 2 stacked and non stacked DataBar Expanded Disabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 14 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled the scanner will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled izabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact number of characters that the scanner will recognize this does not include start
228. l devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Note If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Output 2 Parameters MurpuE On Mutpuk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Diagnostics Output 3 Parameters 5 142 Mismatch or Wo Aead Mismatch or No ARead Good Read Match Mismatch Ho Read Trend Analysis Diagnostic Warming In Read Cycle Read Cycle Data Walid Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Mismatch or No Read Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled enable any output for Match Mismatch Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Typically used when successf
229. l to control QX 870 functions Detailed descriptions of command parameters are available in Chapter 5 Scanner Parameters Communication RS 232 A lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 232 B lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt RS 422 lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Ethernet lt K126 status P address subnet gateway P address mode gt Ethernet TCP Ports lt K127 7CP Port 1 TCP Port 2 gt EtherNet IP lt K129 status gt RS 232 A Data Type lt K130 symbo data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 232 B Data Type lt K131 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt RS 422 Data Type lt K132 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type lt K133 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type lt K134 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt EtherNet IP Data Type lt K136 symbol data output extra symbol information diagnostic output external source processing mode gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeou
230. led sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the Bad Symbol Message is preceded by the identifier for the symbology being used Bad Symbol Message Disabled Message BaD SYMBOL Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol Message Disabled Message B A D T Y M EB 0 L 5 110 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters No Symbol Message Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Can tell the user if an object does not qualify as a symbol Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message When enabled sends a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup but is not decoded Note When Symbology Identifier is enabled the No Symbol Message is preceded by the identifier for the symbology being used No Symbol Message Disabled Message NO SYMBOL Message Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Symbol Message No Symbol Message Disabled Message N oO Ss HM EB 0 L QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 111 I O Parameters Read Duration Output Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an applicatio
231. lly Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 2 255 Humber to Output On T Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example lf Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Humber of Triggers 0 Mumber to Output On D 255 Decodes per Trigger T 5 148 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the scanner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold Note Although this setup causes the scanner to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes per Trigger comman
232. lor gt Default 1 Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High Background Color Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 0 White Options 0 White 1 Black Switch Timing Switch Mode Serial Cmd lt K254 switch mode frame count time gt Default 0 Time Options 0 Time 1 Number of raster sweeps Frame Count Time Serial Cmd lt K254 switch mode frame count time gt Default 10 100 ms Options 1 to 65535 in 10 ms increments A 46 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Symbologies Quiet Zone Appendices lt K450 guiet zone status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Symbol Ratios lt K452 Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 gt Composite lt K453 symbology status separator status separator gt lt K454 status D1 status1 D2 status2 D3 status3 D4 status4 AIAG ID5a ID5b ID5c status5 ID6 status6 ID7 status7 ID8 status8 ID9 status9 ID10 status10 I1D11 status11 ID12 status12 gt Depth of Field Enhance lt K456 DOF Enhance mode gt lt K470 status check character status check character output status Code 39 large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt lt K471 status start stop match status start stop output status Codabar large intercharacter gap fixed s
233. lpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the required output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is complete Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Options 1 to 100 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 79 Serial Commands Length Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output three commands with consecutive index numbers would be required where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example to enter the three character sequence Hi 3 would indicate the length
234. lt 0 any index Options 0 to 10 Output Filter Enable Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 A 82 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Serial Utility Commands Type Command Name Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests lt a1 gt PDF417 Information lt N gt No Read Counter Oooo 0 e No Read Counter Reset PTH Trigger Counter Trigger Counter Reset Counters Device Control Master Database Part Number Checksum Default Reset Save Good Read Match Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Programmable Output 1 Programmable Output 2 Programmable Output 3 Disable Scanner Enable Scanner Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status Display All Firmware Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display FPGA Code Part Number Display All Available Firmware Checksums Display Application Code Code Checksum Display Boot Code Checksum Display FPGA Code Checksum Save Current Settings for Power On Save Current Settings as Customer Default Parameters for Power On Recall Customer Default Settings and Save for Power On Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not default sticky s
235. lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector A Options 0 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX 870 Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 6 EtherNet IP QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 35 Serial Commands Ambles to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Echo to Source Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at End of Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output at ETX Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default CR 0x0D Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Output at Timeout Serial Cmd lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Default 200 x10
236. lter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 4 9 Output Format Output Format Enable Output Format This is a global enable disable parameter Use Set Number of Symbols and Output Phrase to assign symbols for formatting and Symbol Parse to determine the specific output content for the assigned symbols On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box W Enable Output Format Set Number of Symbols 1 2 Output Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postarnble i Enable W Parse W Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive P Show Parse Table Qukoue Formak Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output CR LF W Auto Sync with Reader 4 10 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Set Number of Symbols Number of Symbols determines the number of symbols to which output formatting will apply Output Phrase Scanner Setup Output Phrase refers to the user defined Preamble selected symbols and Postamble sequence in the read cycle result W Enable Output Format Set Number of Symbals 5 lt _ lt Output Phrase Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase bal Sym Preamble Symbol 1 Separato W Enable W Parse ro Symbol 2 Symbol 3 mO mmo M
237. mber of active indexes number of database cycles gt 0 Disabled O to 10 Number of Database Cycles Serial Cmd Default Options lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt 0 Disabled 0 to 255 Configuration Database Index Serial Cmd Options Gain Serial Cmd Default Options AGC Mode Serial Cmd Default Options A 44 lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt 1 to 10 database index number lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt 40 0 to 255 lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt 2 Continuous 0 Disabled 1 Leading Edge 2 Continuous QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Tracking Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Default 40 Options 5 to 127 Raster Top Serial Cmd lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power backgroun
238. md lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 0 Don t Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Symbology Serial Cmd lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 63 Serial Commands Control Hex Output Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default 0 Control Options 0 Control 1 Hex Beeper Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default 1 Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Quality Output Separator Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default Comma Options Any bit ASCII character Decodes per Trigger Status Serial Cmd lt K704 separator decodes per trigger status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Status Serial Cmd lt
239. mege 162 148 88 51 TCP For Help press F1 1 8 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Quick Start Step 7 Test Read Rate Read Rate indicates the number or percentage of successful decodes per second achieved by the scanner 1 Click the Test button in ESP s EZ Mode to start the Read Rate test Symbol data and read rate percentage information should appear in the Symbol Information table in the bottom portion of the view The Read Rate LEDs on the side of the QX 870 will indicate the percentage of successful decodes per second 2 Click Stop to end the Read Rate test Note Read Rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities Test Calibrate Decodes per Second Stop Save QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 1 9 Configure the Scanner Step 8 Configure the Scanner Click the App Mode button to make configuration changes to the scanner i E App Mode The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen Sa 3y ss wk Ef Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities e Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode e Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication e Click the Send Recv button to send or receive commands e Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu or to return to a previous model e Click the Parameters button
240. message gt User Defined Name lt K412 user defined name gt High Temperature Threshold Serial Cmd lt K402 status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Message Serial Cmd lt K402 status message gt Default HIGH_TEMP Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Low Temperature Threshold Serial Cmd lt K403 status message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Message Serial Cmd lt K403 status message gt Default LOW_TEMP Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Counts Read only Power On Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets 0ower on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments on scanner power on Resets Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on Saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments on scanner reset Value is reset on power on A 76 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Power On Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments when a scanner setting is saved for power on lt Z gt command Custom Default Saves Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves power on flash saves gt 16 bit counter that increments when a scanner setting is saved to the customer parameter section of flash memory lt Zc gt command Hours Since Reset Read only Hours Serial Cmd lt K407 ho
241. mine the appropriate minimum and maximum gain e Set AGC Sampling Mode to Disabled Fixed Gain and find the range of gain levels that yields successful decodes in the application both the lowest and the highest gain levels e Enter those values in the AGC Minimum and AGC Maximum fields This will leave the scanner room for gain changes to increase depth of field within the limitations of what works for the application Maximum gain may be too high for symbols on white backgrounds because it may attempt to process false bars Especially in applications using symbologies that require more processing setting gain too high can slow decode performance substantially Setting a minimum gain can prevent the system from occasionally under gaining because of previous false candidates that appear very bright QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 63 Read Cycle Tracking Tracking is the frequency detection value that determines the threshold between a white bar and a black bar This is a range of frequencies that have been divided into 127 steps For most applications the default tracking value 40 is robust enough to deal with most marginal signals However in some instances symbols are printed on a noisy substrate or symbols are relatively distant from the scanner and the signal to noise ratio and optical focus are not ideal In such cases using a combination of Gain Level and Tracking can improve decode perform
242. ms 2 seconds Options 0 65535 Array Communication Modes Mode Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Daisy Chain A 36 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Source Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector B Options 0 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector A 1 RS 232 on QX 870 Connector B 2 RS 422 on QX 870 Connector B 4 Ethernet TCP Port 1 5 Ethernet TCP Port 2 Daisy Chain ID Status Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Daisy Chain ID Serial Cmd lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Default 1 Options One or two ASCII characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 37 Serial Commands Read Cycle Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration lt K200 trigger mode leading edge trigger filter duration trailing edge trigger filter duration gt Serial Trigger Character External Trigger State lt K201 serial trigger character gt lt K202 external trigger state gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 mode read cycle timeout gt Decodes Before Output lt K221 mode number before output gt Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Serial Trigger St
243. n the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin transitions Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output The only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value
244. n inches and bar width in mils or thousandths of an inch of user created symbols Example A bar width of 13 mils is 0 013 inches Caption Allows the user to define a caption for the symbol and to determine the alignment of the caption in relation to the symbol 2 8 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Preferences gt Advanced Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Sync When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following Always Ask Before Auto Syne Occurs C Receive Settings fram the Reader f Send ESP Settings to the Reader f Do Not Send or Receive Settings Send 80N with Autoconnect i Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting iM Connect to readers via TCP IP Use Default Storage Location Default Settings The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow the user to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If this option box is checked specific Auto Sync functions can be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the scanner s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all scanner configuration settings chosen in ESP to the scanner Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not aut
245. n line is appended to the symbol data output The scan position is formatted with a leading identifier of SP plus two zero padded three digit numbers corresponding to the first and last bar of the symbol for most symbologies separated by a colon The scan position values correspond to the configurable Laser On Off position values in the Laser Setup command Example Assume a symbol with the data HELLO is read when its first bar is at 25 of the scan width and its last bar is at 85 of the scan width The data output would be HELLO SP025 085 assuming that no other outputs or formatting were enabled Separator This character separates all other symbol information from the Scan Status data field Symbol Position Output Raster Status Disabled Scan Skatus Disabled Separator 3 ekg ekg BEEE BBE wo a m uw 3E 2 ERR RE SEBS Be E Click Delete to remove characters 5 166 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Matchcode Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display 7 the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Matchcode tab to display the Matchcode tree control 7 Sy Parameters l Communication Read Cycle Symbologies ro Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Matchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Lengt
246. n the QX 870 but they do not have explicit pin assignments The QX 1 allows users to bus power and communications as required by the application QX 1 Interface Device Pin Assignment 1 10 28V 2 Trig NM Input 1 Common 3 Ground 4 Trigger ZA AA Connectors 1 and 3 are 12 pin plugs and Connector 2 is a 12 pin socket All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data as required by the application The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed QxX 1 Trigger Connector 4 pin Socket COMM 0 POWER This simple diagram shown on the base of the QX 1 illustrates how power communications I O and trigger signal can be routed through the QX 1 device depending on the needs of the application The switches greatly increase signal routing flexibility TRIGGER QX 1 Communications I O QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Power Trigger 3 7 Power and Trigger Switching Power and Trigger Switching Power can be bussed between scanners and interface devices At each location on a network where a new power supply is added the Power switch on the QX 1 can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1 3 and T can be broken using the Trigger switch This isolates trigger signals as required by the application
247. n to determine maximum line speed obtainable based on spacing between symbols When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of duration if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Read Duration Output Disabled Separator i Separator User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Separator FE on CI L on a m a m m m k eE da Bl m D P I D Li tI CI J Foz T Ea uw PE m lM z Click Delete to remove characters 5 112 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output Indicators Output Indicators Green Flash Mode On Good Read Green Flash Duration 100 Beeper On Good Read The QX 870 has a beeper and two LED arrays as follows 1 An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the scanner that can be programmed to flash in response to user defined conditions 2 An array of status LEDs on the side of the scanner Green Flash Mode Output Indicators Green Flash Mode
248. n your reader at the distance from the symbol recommended by the specifications far the unit 2 To avoid specular reflection pitch the reader or the symbol 15 degrees Click Calibrate to begin the calibration routine Calibration is explained at the left of the EZ Mode screen and also in Quick Start 3 Click Test to begin Click the App Mode button to access configuration trees and other setup features Stop Save Symbol Information Attribute wt For Help press F1 GOMRESTEDI Point to Point COMI 115 2K M 8 1 2 2 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual App Mode Using ESP From EZ Mode click on the App Mode button to access the tabbed tree controls in Parameters the intuitive user interfaces in Setup the Terminal interface and the Utilities interface Sai pp Mode Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Calibration Configuration Database Ordered Output Output Format Click this icon to return to EZ Mode ESF ESP Untitled GG File Model Options Connect wiew Help lt j Menu toolbar Ef Mode Autoconnect SendfRecy Switch Model Parameters Communication Read Cycle Symbolagies 10 Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters Communications RSZ A RSZ B RS42z Ethernet P
249. nate Transfer 1 Starting with a RES ensures a clean transaction without leftovers from the previous transaction Error Condition 1 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX HOST _TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again timeout reached SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 data is flushed A 90 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Error Condition 2 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX HOST _TX Nothing Host should ACK here timeout reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event SCANNER_TX 0x1C STX lt T 00000 gt ETX Unit sends again HOST_TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 91 Protocol Commands Setup 2 Address 0x01 translates to Poll Req 0x1C Unit Select 0x1D RES 0x04 REQ 0x05 STX 0x0
250. ndustrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Calibration Options Calibration Options specifies the operation of the calibration feature The default configuration is set up to perform calibration on Gain Focus and Symbol Type Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Video When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Video settings Gain and Tracking Video settings include Gain and Tracking Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Don t Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Scan Speed When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Scan Speed If a better read rate at a different speed is found the new speed will be the calibration result for Scan Speed Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Don t Calibrate Laser Framing Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate Laser Power When set to Calibrate there will be an attempt to change Laser Power If a better read rate at a higher power is found or if the same read rate at a lower power is found the new power level will be the calibration result for Laser Power Calibration Options Video Calibrate Scan Speed Calibrate Laser Power Calibrate Laser Framing Don t Calibrate Symbol Type Calibrate
251. net interface used to connect multiple locations in a network such as computers in an office network It can also be used to network other communications devices such as scanners and PLCs on a factory floor EtherNet IP is a protocol developed and governed by ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association It is based on the Common Industrial Protocol CIP The CIP layer is an additional layer within the standard Ethernet interface Ethernet TCP IP EtherNet IP is common in control systems and PLCs especially in the United States The highlighted areas below demonstrate how an Ethernet daisy chain can be arranged Ethernet enabled scanners can also be set up in standalone configurations or multiple Ethernet enabled scanners along a production or packaging line can be connected to Ethernet A mg lt To Power Supply Q To Host Ethernet J 7 L QX 1 mg SE i gt gt a NEF C7 ap O gt HT r J m To Power Supply lt HUIS AL H a rig QX 1 Multidrop upply Concentrator dejan 5 or PL EtherNet IP and CIP are trademarks of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association 3 12 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual E 4 Scanner Setup Contents 6 2 0 2 11 6 aac ene ee eee eee en nee eee eee 4 2 COMMOUP AMON Data asSE sssrin eana ena ia EEE AE cect EASRA EEEa eraa ERE ERE Reas 4 4 Ordered fg 0 0 0 kamen see re ete eer eee ame eee ee ee ee eee ee 4 6 OTE ON acetic is nanc
252. nfiguration The command to Autoconfigure the daisy chain is sent to the primary scanner and the software responds in the following ways e Counts the number of secondary scanners in the daisy chain e Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary scanner where the first secondary scanner is number 1 the primary scanner s ID being a 0 e Propagates the communication settings and the relevant operating modes of the primary scanner to the ports of each secondary scanner e Resets each secondary scanner e Confirms that each secondary scanner has acquired the new settings When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the primary scanner the one connected to the host to Serial Data Trigger Mode This sets all the scanners in the chain to Serial Data when the command is executed Important All secondary scanners must be set to Serial Data Trigger Mode for Daisy Chain to function Before Autoconfigure the primary scanner must be set to Serial S Primary Secondary Secondary Scanner Scanner Scanner S S S Host 2 Send the lt K150DAISY gt command from ESP s Terminal 3 If necessary set the primary scanner to External Edge After Autoconfigure the primary scanner can be set to External Edge E but the other scanners must remain in Serial S amp Primary Secondary Secondary Scanner Sca
253. ning tracking or when conditions of poor contrast or blurred bar edges exist Tracks peak signals and selects an amplitude reference point to sample the analog signals for converting to digital Note Tracking is optimized at the factory before shipment in some cases the default value might not be 40 Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 a 5 127 Scan Speed SU Automatic Sain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous Acs Minimum T Ars Maximum ints Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled Scan Speed Allows the user to set the number of scans per second by controlling the motor speed of the spinning mirror in the scanner Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 500 300 1400 Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGC Minimum 0 Acs Maximum 299 Symbol Detect Status Disabled Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 57 Read Cycle Automatic Gain Control AGC Sampling Mode Disabled Fixed Gain When AGC Sampling Mode is Disabled the first parameter in the Gain Level command defines the Fixed Gain used to amplify the analog signal In most applications when changing the sampling mode to Disabled the Gain Level will need to be changed For Fixed Gain operation changes to gain adjustment settings can be performed in Au
254. nner Scanner E S S Host Important If the scanner is Ethernet enabled first check to determine if RS 232 B is available If it is available set RS 232 B as the Source port in Array Communication Modes Otherwise set RS 232 A as the Source port Port Routing for Symbol Data Output and Extra Symbol Information will be disabled on the Source port QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 37 Communication Preamble Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Preamble Characters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Preamble Preamble Characters 5 38 Disabled SOH 1 ETX EOT ENO Ack BEL BS HT LF VT FF cR 50 si DLE Dci Dez De3 Dea mak svn ETB CAN EM SUB ESC Fs Gs As us SP Click Delete to remove characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Postamble Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a Carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line Preamble Disabled Preamble Characters CR Postamble Charac
255. no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 7 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt e All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 23 Serial Commands Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 7 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Quiet Zone and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted send the Show Reader Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed M J enter lt K141 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt A 24 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Serial Configuration Commands The following serial commands can be entered through ESP s Termina
256. ns n columns number of informative code words n code words and number of data bits n data bits This feature can be disabled by sending lt a1 gt again QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 5 Counters Counters Utilities Click the Utilities button and then the Counters tab to display the Counters view Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the rollover has occurred add 65536 per each rollover the scanner does not keep track of the number of rollovers to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the scanner or if the scanner receives a Reset or Save command Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Request Clear Tiner pO Trigger Good Read No ead and Mismatch Regest Cler_ Goodreat Sirutansoucly Request Request Clear O and Clear buttons fo the Request Clear Aai pO Request All Clear All counters can be All and Clear All buttons left of each item QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Cou
257. nters Serial Utility Commands No Read Counter sending lt N gt displays the total number of No Reads that have occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset sending lt O gt sets the No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending lt V gt displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested at any time Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 Mismatch Counter sending lt X gt displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to zero QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 7 Device Control Device Control Click the Utilities button and then the Device Control tab Utilities to display the Device Control view Read Fiate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware Outputs Outp
258. nual 5 40 Scanner Parameters Read Cycle Setup Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters involves a series of decisions based on the particular application as follows 1 Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle 2 Decide on the trigger type to be used if serial choose a serial character if external choose either External Level or External Edge 3 Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 41 Read Cycle Multisymbol Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle The following conditions apply e The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3 000 for all symbols e All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string unless output filtering is enabled e If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration Multisymbal Number af Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator i Numbe
259. nual Scanner Parameters Port Routing The QX 870 features a communication system based on Port Routing instead of traditional dedicated serial ports Decisions can be made about the direction and content of communication between ports based on different Data Types Any available port can be used in any combination The fundamental concept of Port Routing is that communication design can be based upon Data Types rather than ports The advantage of this is the ability to map different data types to different ports the user is no longer limited to a Host Port and Aux Port for specific types of input and output Since each port is independent instead of fixed for a particular purpose the scanner behaves more like a data switch Primary Secondary Port Routing Command Data F ASSIA Command Data h W R5232 B W R5422 TCP Port imee Ble Extended Data i TCP Port 2 Diagnostic Data i EtherNetvlP Symbol Data I AS232 4 W R5232 B AS42232 W TEP Port 1 W TCP Port 2 iw EtherNet lP Send Settings Send and Save Port Routing Advantages e Data can be routed in on one port and out on the same port or a different port like a switch or router Transparent Mode Half Duplex Mode Full Duplex Mode and Custom Mode e External Data Routing still follows the To From Host Aux paradigm The new capability allows the customer to define the data direction which port behaves as the Host Port an
260. ock Connectors Microscan has adopted Ultra Lock connectivity because of speed ease of use and ingress protection considerations The main advantage of the Ultra Lock system is that only two steps are required at every connection point 1 Align the connector and receptacle keys 2 Push the connector into place Do not twist the connector as this can bend the pins Ultra Lock connectors are operator independent This means that they are not subject to under tightening or over tightening both of which are common problems with screw down connectors and both of which undermine the moisture resistant seal ULTRA LOCK s RADIAL SEAL A UNDER TIGHTENING f OVER TIGHTENING Operator independent Axial Compression Seal Axial Compression Seal Reliable watertight is incomplete allowing can become damaged constant pressure seal moisture to penetrate so moisture can enter and create shorts Ultra Lock Connector Traditional Threaded Connectors Another advantage of the QX 870 s Ultra Lock connectivity scheme is that the Ultra Lock receptacles on the scanners and the QxX 1 Interface Device also accept screw down connectors giving users the flexibility to use either Ultra Lock or screw down connectors Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex 3 2 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Hardware Installation Cordsets The terms cordset and cable are both applicable to industrial connectivity
261. odes click the Percent radio button and then the Start button To end a Read Rate test click the Stop Read Rate information is displayed in button the Start button becomes a Stop the lower portion of the Utilities view button during an active Read Rate test Serial commands can also be sent to the scanner from this screen For Help press F1 ONNESTEON Point to Point COMI Important When Read Rate is enabled the Configuration Database is not active regardless of how the scanner is configured 7 4 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Read Rate Serial Utility Commands Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the scanner to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the scanner during setup Enter Decode Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the scanner to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data End Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test PDF417 Information Sending lt a1 gt causes PDF417 data that is decoded in a triggered read cycle to be prefaced with information about the symbol s level of error correction error correction level n number of rows n rows number of colum
262. of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 would be the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since there is a limit of 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry there is a limit of 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NULL 0x00 Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs Format Assign Symbol Number Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1 to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol A 80 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Output Format Status Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Options 1 to 10 Symbology Type Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data decode direction database index gt Default 0 Options 0 Any type 1
263. of Terms AGC See Automatic Gain Control Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude value is the information Automatic Gain Control AGC Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a scanner and symbol Baud Rate The number of discrete signal events per second bits per second Check Character A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator Intermediary device that relays data from scanners to a host and commands from the host to the scanners or other devices Counter Memory space allocated to keep track of scanner events Daisy Chain Linkage of primary and secondary scanners allowing data to be sent to the host Decode A good read The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores non volatile or flash memory settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second ahieved by a scanner Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching
264. omatically send scanner settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the scanner Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the scanner before starting the Autoconnect routine QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Preferences gt Advanced Tab cont Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting When enabled prompts the user to save a esp file when ending a session i P Save changes to session Desp o cme The esp file will be saved in the location specified by the user My Documents Fie Edt wiew Favorites Tools Help ar Links pack hi P a Search oy Folders EBk Address E My Documents a eC Folders Mame Size Type i Desktop E session 3 esp 6KE ESP Document a My Documents fe My Computer GB 344 Floppy tA Se Local Disk ic mo gt 4 Connect to Readers via TCP IP When enabled shows the TCP IP Connection Wizard by default IP Address 162 148 88 51 C RS 232 Ethemet TCP Port 1 2001 zal Search Use Default Storage Location When enabled automatically stores data in ESP s Application Data folder 2 10 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Document Memo The information entered in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document T
265. ommand is set to Frame 20 Perform laser framing if enabled 21 If symbology detection is enabled update user NOVRAM with any new symbologies detected during calibration Notes If any step in the calibration process fails of if the user cancels calibration the remainder of calibration is canceled and all settings are restored to their previous state This does not apply to symbology status when symbology detection is enabled Any symbols that are decoded during calibration will be enabled even if any other calibration processes fail or are canceled 7 26 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Bar Code Configuration Mode Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the scanner by using symbols Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered two different ways 1 By forcing the scanner into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the four EZ Button positions Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps to Bar Code Configuration Mode Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered symbols can be thought of as serial data Configure the scanner by printing symbols in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The scanner will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the scanner to produce more serial output
266. only known outout state will be the on a power on or reset After reading begins the state becomes undetermined Only the state change itself has meaning not the absolute value QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 145 I O Parameters Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re enter Read Cycle The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins Note All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 2 Trend Analysis Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Under Output 2 Parameters expand the Trend Analysis tree Useful in cases where the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 2 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Trend Analysis Mode No Read Trigger Evaluation Period 25 triggers read cycles Number to Output On 4 In this example the scanner will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers read cycles 5 146 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read Decodes per Trigger Ba
267. onnector T has been modified by swapping the input common and trigger pins The pin assignments on all other connectors remain the same Pin assignment modifications are highlighted Connector T Pin Name Photo Sensor 1 iPower Power 2 Trigger NPN 3 Ground Ground 4 Input Common Jumper to Power Note Use a PNP photo sensor when the QX 870 is connected to the MS Connect 210 The proper configuration is shown here Photo Sensor Power PNP Ground Jumper to Pin 3 B amp O ND QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 17 Updated Pin Assignment of QX Connector T Part Number Transition The following table shows the new part numbers of the affected QX 870s and QX 1s Original Part Number New Part Number _ Description FIS 0870 0001G FIS 0870 0004G QX 870 Low Density Serial FIS 0870 0002G FIS 0870 0003G FIS 0870 0005G FIS 0870 0006G QX 870 Medium Density Serial QX 870 High Density Serial FIS 0870 1001G FIS 0870 1002G FIS 0870 1004G FIS 0870 1005G QX 870 Low Density Serial Ethernet QX 870 Medium Density Serial Ethernet FIS 0870 1003G FIS 0870 1006G QX 870 High Density Serial Ethernet 98 000103 01 98 000103 02 QX 1 Interface Accessory A 18 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix F Serial Commands Note For a list of utility commands such as
268. ood read Decodes Before Output Mode Non consecutive Number Before Gutput 3 Decodes Before Output Mode Decodes Before Output Made or consecutive Number Before Output a a Consecutive Non Consecutive In Non Consecutive mode decodes will be counted in any order Multiple symbols can be decoded in any order Consecutive In Consecutive mode all decodes must be identical until the good read count is satisfied Only one unique symbol can be qualified at a time Number Before Output The number of successful decodes performed by the scanner before symbol data is output Decodes Before Output Mode Non consecutive Number Before Gutput 3 1 255 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 51 Read Cycle End of Read Cycle The read cycle is the time during which the scanner will attempt to decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout or a new trigger or a combination of the two End of Read Cycle Mode Timeout Read Cycle Timeout 100 End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner is always in the read cycle End of Read Cycle CE E Read Cycle Timeout Toe New Trigger Timeout or New Trigger Last Frame Last Frame or New Trigger Timeout Typically used with Continuous Read 1 Output and Serial Data and Edge It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum lengt
269. oolbar View The View menu allows the user to move quickly between the Setup Terminal and Utilities interfaces without using the icon TIE buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows the user to EECC access the Bar Code Dialog shown below Setup Terminal Utilities Bar Code Dialog Symbols can be created in the Bar Code Dialog by typing the text to be encoded This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing the user to configure the scanner by reading the user created symbols Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Configuration Print Save 4s Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to Bar Code Yalue lt gt i encode new symbols Choose a spatial l orientation e Rotation o Degrees Hew new symbol Caption Create a caption f Same As Bar Code Value for the symbol that matches or Specify describes the encoded data Add start configuration code Add end configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog 2 14 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Navigating in ESP To change scanner settings or to access the Setup Terminal or Utilities views click the App Mode button Jie aot 400 Mode To return to EZ Mode click
270. operties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address x IP address Select Use the following IP address to set 92 168 0 101 the IP Address Subnet and Gateway Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Prefered DNS server Altemate DNS server QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 97 Using EtherNet IP Appendix J Using EtherNet IP This Appendix describes the Microscan Serial Interface Object Model Throughout this document this port will referred to as the EIP Overview The EIP interface will be identified as a Generic Device 0x00 The interface is designed to support remote serial transmit and receive using explicit unconnected messaging Necessary Tools The following tools are necessary for configuring the EIP e EtherNet IP Messaging Tool can be a PLC or Software Tool must be capable of establishing an explicit messaging connection and sending the vendors specific Send With Response explicit messages Terminal emulation or serial communication tool that can connect to a TCP socket such as HyperTerminal e ESP Microscan s Easy Setup Program This tool has the ab
271. ossary Of Terms ccccecccecsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeeseees A 108 Iv QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Introduction About the QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner The key features of the QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner are e Quick and easy configuration with Ultra Lock cables and connectors e X Mode symbol reconstruction and aggressive decode algorithm e Embedded Ethernet TCP IP and EtherNet IP e Ultra high performance processing e Real time decoding e A green flash visible from all angles to signal a successful read e LED array for performance communication and I O user feedback e EZ Button for setup and testing e Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications e True IP65 sealing Scanner Communication There are three ways to configure and test the QX 870 e Microscan s Windows based ESP Software Easy Setup Program which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments e Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt that can be sent from ESP s Terminal or another terminal program The EZ Button on the side of the scanner Ultra Lock is a trademark of Woodhead Molex EtherNet IP is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual vV Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
272. out reached SCANNER_TX REQ Unit requests an ACK again HOST _TX NAK Host rejects data frame Retry Event SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX LRC Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 Error Condition 3 HOST_TX RES 0x1C REQ Poll Unit 1 for data SCANNER_TX 0Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX BAD LRC HOST TX NAK Host rejects bad LRC data Retry Event SCANNER_TX Ox1C STX lt T O0000 gt ETX GOOD LRC Unit sends again HOST TX ACK Host receives data SCANNER_TX RES Terminate Transfer 1 The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 93 ASCII Table Appendix H ASCII Table Dec Hex Mne Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 64 40 96 60 01 01 SOH 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX C 99 63 C 04 04 EOT D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 105 69 i 10 0A LF J 106 6A j 11 0B VT K 107 6B k 12 OC FF L 108 6C l 13 OD CR M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 110 6E n 15 OF SI O 111 6F O 16 10 DLE 0 P 112 70 p 17 11 DCI 1 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 2 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC
273. p ap Insert SoH STX ETK EOT ENO ACK BEL Bs f HT LF it FF cal sof si s1 per Dc2f Dej Deal Mak SYN ETB CAN EM sue Esc Fs Gs AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Cancel Sample Symbol Parse Original ABCOEFGHWELMNOPORS TU 201 23456709 Output The Insert process is very similar to the Extract process except that Insert allows the user to enter characters using the Insert calculator shown above OF Cancel Symbol Parse Parse symbols send and Save Insert Data Extract Range Insert YF Hide Parse Table Extract Build Sequence Test Insert Data Extract Range Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Sample Symbol Parse Original micro Original ABCOEFGHWELMNOPORS TU 201 23456709 Output cro lt Output CDE Cancel QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 4 13 Output Format 4 14 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual EE 5 Scanner Parameters Contents COMMUNICATION eee cece ccc eccecceeceececeeceeeeceeeceeeneeeceueeeeeneeeeeaeeaueaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeueeaeeneeaueeeeaeeaesaueeaesaeeness 5 2 Read Cycle ae oices asian cosecsascactanseneessneinasnsbenasedanbenatsadexendeadaseneunentseds sae
274. parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd A 26 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Stop Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 422 Status RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K 9 230K Parity RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 422 Serial Cmd lt K102 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 27 Options
275. perature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Calibration Options Raster Framing lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt lt K811 outout on output state pulse width output mode gt lt K812 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Serial Cmd lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Raster Frame Options 0 As ls 1 Raster Frame 2 Raster Straight Line A 62 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 Raster Search Appendices Video Serial Cmd lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Scan Speed Serial Cmd lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Default 1 Calibrate Options 0 Don t Calibrate 1 Calibrate Laser Framing Serial C
276. ponse Timeout Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The scanner can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero The time that the scanner will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port RSZ232 ACK f NAK Options RES MUL REQ NUL STX MUL ETK MUL ACK ACK HAK MAK Polling Mode Options RES EOT REQ ENG STA STX ETX ETX ALK ACK MAK MAK Response Timeout 0 005 Seconds LEC Status Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 27 Communication LRC Status Used when extra data integrity is required An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 and a 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results Protocol Selection Point to Point Address 1 Protocol Port R5232 4
277. postamble character s gt Default CR LF 0x0D 0x0A Options 1 4 ASCII characters Response Timeout Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 5 x10 ms 50 Options 0 to 255 x10 ms LRC Status Serial Cmd lt K145 status gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ACK NAK Options Serial Cmd lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 00 disabled REQ Request 00 disabled STX Start of Text 00 disabled ETX End of Text 00 disabled ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 33 Serial Commands Polling Mode Options Serial Cmd lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt RES NAK Defaults RES Reset 04 REQ Request 05 STX Start of Text 02 ETX End of Text 03 ACK Acknowledge 06 NAK Negative Acknowledge 15 Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt ASCII Character Entry Modifier Commands that require ASCII text fields such as Preamble and Postamble commands can be sent to the scanner as hex pairs see ASCII Table for conversions Serial Cmd Format lt Knnnh 00 FF gt To enter ASCII fields as hex values 00 to FF add a lower case h directly after the command s K number and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character Example Serial Cmd lt K142 status postamble character s gt The ASCII characters lt gt
278. r Entering and Using Master Symbols 1 Set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data 2 Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits the application 3 Define the type of output required with Matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols required 5 Decide how the master symbol s will be entered a Use ESP to type master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of lt K231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol 5 168 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Matchcode Type Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Trigger Mode to External Level External Edge or Serial Data Matchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Disabled Match Start Position Enabled Match Length sequeritial wild Card Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Sequential Instructs the scanner to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Instructs the scanner to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequent
279. r On Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 68 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices EZ Button Modes Serial Cmd lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 1 Read Rate 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 2 Auto Calibration 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 3 Save for Power On 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 4 Auto Framing 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 5 Load New Master 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 6 Sleep Mode 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 7 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 8 Unused 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config Auto Framing Options Laser Status Serial Cmd lt K773 unused laser status gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Mode Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on decodes per trigger threshold gt Default 1 No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Decodes per Trigg
280. r User s Manual 5 155 I O Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse ssi Fulze Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Fin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input 1 Pin Note Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid then the read cycle will wait for Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel The read cycle data must leave all channels before Read Cycle Data Valid will output Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite cond
281. r and Start Menu 89 User Accounts Windows Firewall sa Wireless Network Setup Wizard lt Comments Adjust your computer settings for vision hearing and mobility Installs and troubleshoots hardware Install or remove programs and Windows components Configure administrative settings for your computer Calibrate monitor For consistent color create ICC profile Set up Windows to automatically deliver important updates Set the date time and time zone for your computer Change the appearance of your desktop such as the background screen saver colors Font sizes and screen resolution Customize the display of files and Folders change file associations and make network files available offline Add change and manage fonts on your computer Add remove and configure game controller hardware such as joysticks and gamepads Configure your Internet display and connection settings Customize your keyboard settings such as the cursor blink rate and the character repeat rate Microsoft Office Outlook Profiles Customize your mouse settings such as the button configuration double click speed mouse pointers and motion speed Specify the CD DYD burn rights For the Nero Family of products Connects to other computers networks and the Internet Configure your NVIDIA nv iew Desktop Manager settings Configure your telephone dialing rules and modem settings Configure energy saving settings for your computer Shows installed pr
282. r of Symbols Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle Multisymbal Number of Symbols 1 100 Multisymbol Separator i Multisymbol Separator Multisymbol Separator is used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character The Multisymbol Separator can be any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Number of Symbols is set to any number greater than 1 Multisymbol Number of Symbols 1 Multisymbol Separator 7 STx ETX EOT ENa BEL BS HT LF vT cn _s0 _s DLE Det pc2 DC3 _DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM Sus Esc _F5 Gs AS us se Click Delete to remove characters HE 5 42 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Trigger The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle Note When calibrating the scanner or testing read rate the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge J313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed Trigger Mode Continuous Read Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or scanner functions It is not recommended for normal operations In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the scanner is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit data for every symbol If a singl
283. raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Raster Sweep Count MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 65535 Options 1 to 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 366 A 60 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Symbol Reconstruction Symbol Reconstruction Redundancy Serial Cmd lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Low 2 Medium 3 High Symbol Reconstruction Effort Serial Cmd lt K496 symbol reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction effort gt Default 0 Minimum Options 0 Minimum 1 Moderate 2 Maximum QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 61 Serial Commands I O Parameters Calibration Options lt K521 raster framing video scan speed laser power laser framing symbology gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt
284. re the primary ways that the scanner communicates calibration progress LEDs Calibration Progress 20 Search Pass in progress 20 40 Locate Center Focus in progress 20 40 60 Medium Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 Fine Tune Pass in progress 20 40 60 80 100 Calibrated Successfully holds for green flash duration Beeper Green Flash The beeper and green LED flash are used to indicate calibration status as shown in the table below Indicator Status 2 quick beeps Calibration has started 5 quick beeps Calibration has failed 1 long beep Calibration has been completed successfully 1 sec Green Flash Calibration has been completed successfully 7 24 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Outline of Full Auto Calibration Process Auto Calibration runs a calibration cycle for the scanner to optimize basic symbol decoding parameters Focus Gain Shutter Speed and Symbol Type are all configured during Auto Calibration To configure the operation of Auto Calibration see Calibration Options The calibration cycle can be entered either through ESP serial command or the EZ Button 1 If laser power calibration is enabled set laser power to factory default If motor speed calibration is enabled set motor speed to factory default If video calibration is enabled set gain and tracking to default If symbology detection is enabled
285. roduction Table of Contents QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Hardware cccccccccesecccceeeeeceseeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeees 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SySteM ccccccssssecceceseeececeeeeecseeseeessaeseeesssaeeees 1 3 Step 3 Position Scanner and Symbol cccecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 4 Step 4 Install ESP cc cccccecsseeecesseecesseecesseeecceeecesseeseseeseaseessgeeess 1 5 Step 5 Select Model cc eeccccecceceeeeecceeeeceeeeeesceeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeees 1 6 Step 0 COMNSCU sends ved resigeetned e e e e AE Ea aOR 1 7 Step 7 Test Read Rate cccccccccccceccecseceeseseessesceseeeeeessaeeesaaeeesaagees 1 10 Step 8 Configure the Scanner cccccseeecceeeeeeecceeeeececaeseeessenseeseeees 1 11 Step 9 Save Changes in ESP cccccscceccesseceeeceeseeecseeseeesaueeseesseaees 1 12 Chapter 2 Using ESP EZ MOJE asno e a ss neice ec ee ele 2 2 APPMOG Caime a a aa 2 3 Meng TOODA riran a a a tote NO eee ene 2 4 Navigating IM ESP scceim a e a 2 15 Send Receive OptiOnS 2 2cineei rn eee ec elt cc eee 2 16 Chapter 3 Hardware Integration CONNECCION ES 3 2 COSE er E O 3 3 QB LOAN OA rna in ceumvigieadansanciidedousaheteed deressndoratetived 3 4 Power and Trigger SWItChing ccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeneas 3 6 POER UIT IAG so onscrntc a ee aaa Namie Serseet cad viatuaduad
286. rotocol Selection External Data Routing Freamble Fostamble For Help press F1 Autoconnect to the scanner Send and Receive command settings and Switch Model Array Communication Modes QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Y Setup ESP Values Code Firmware Enabled Disabled Enabled Click here to open the Terminal view Sele n Read Rate gt lt Counters Device Temini Uie Control Differences from Default Master Database Digital Bar Tabbed tree controls Point to Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled OMMESTEDNI Point to Point COM1 115 2K M 8 1 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is a loaded us Hew Ctrl M Open Save Open Chrl When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is Save Chrl 5 saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever Save os the same file is selected under Open Important When configuration changes are saved to the hard PEMEak Ctrl F drive these changes are not automatically saved to the scanner Import The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and E received between ESP and the scanner and ESP and the host ESPO hard drive Recent File Exit ge Save to Scanner Receive Scanner Settings Import Export Import converts the ASCII se
287. rrent status low current message gt Default LOW_LASER Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters User Defined Name Serial Cmd lt K412 user defined name gt Default QX 870 Options Any valid ASCII string up to 50 characters A 78 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Output Format Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Output Format Status lt K743 output format status gt lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard placeholder CHEE FEE C OUNGUTANON data decode direction database index gt Output Filter Enable lt K745 number of filters gt Format Extract Output Index Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Options 1 to 100 Start Location Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Length Serial Cmd lt K740 output index start location length gt Default 0 Disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Format Insert Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be he
288. rs Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the I O tab to display the I O Parameters tree control 3 Parameters l Communication Read Cycle Symbologies IO Matchcade Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values O Parameters Symbol Data Output Good Read No Read Message Enabled Bad Symbol Message Disabled Wo Symbol Message Disabled Read Duration Gutput Disabled Output Indicators Serial Verification EZ Button Enabled Status Indicators PHY Activity Calibration Options Database Identifier Output Disabled The indicates that the setting Disabled is the default Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters fe Counts Output 3 Parameters Unlatch Output Quality Qutpuk A i Symbol Position Gutput To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note I O Parameters settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the I O Parameters section of Appendix E 5 106 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions Useful when the host
289. rs read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 3000 Match Length 1 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled Match Length Example f Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set to 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater When Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position m Match Length i 1 S000 Wild Card i Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Skep 1 New Master Pin Disabled 5 170 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Wild Card Example With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master
290. ry Requirement Implementation Per requirement If the device does not have an IP Before device has No power no Steady OFF IP address address or is powered off the network acquired an IP status indicator will be steady OFF address via DHCP If the device has no established connections eller tae ik Flashing No connecione but has obtained an IP address the acquired an IP GREEN network status indicator will be flashing address static or GREEN DHCP If the device has at least one established connection even to the Message Router the network status indicator will be steady GREEN Steady GREEN Connected Per requirement Per requirement If one or more of the connections in but limited Flashing Connection which the device is the target has RED will only last timeout timed out the network status indicator for 3 seconds will be flashing RED then will revert to flashing GREEN Flashing RED If the device has detected that its IP Steady RED Duplicate IP address is already in use the network Not implemented status indicator will be steady RED While the device is performing its Per requirement Self test power up testing the module status but unlikely to be indicator will be flashing GREEN RED seen Flashing GREEN RED A 104 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Appendix K Operating the Serial Gateway Data Fields in the QX 870 EtherNet
291. s Rules that apply to both configuration and utility commands e Less than lt and greater than gt angle bracket characters enclose the commands e Commands and data are case sensitive Characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands are sent during operations and are not followed by lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration Commands K Commands Microscan s serial configuration commands begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character comma separated command fields and an initializing command as follows lt Knumeric character data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt Z gt or lt A gt may follow the command e lt Z gt initializes the scanner s memory and saves for power on e lt A gt initializes the scanner s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions e All command fields except the last must be followed by a comma without a space e NULL cannot be used The characters lt gt and can be used but only if entered as hex pairs see ASCII Character Entry Modifier e All fields preceding a modified field must be included e If there is
292. s Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers T Number to Oukput On T Decodes per Trigger j Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Enabled Laser Current Low Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output Skate Normally Open Pulse width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Oukput On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Decaer Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 163 I O Parameters Low Temperature Activates output when the temperature drops below factory defined lower limits Output 3 Parameters Gutpuk On Mismatch Oukput State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 QGutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output Cr 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled isabled Enabled 5 164 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Quality Output Quality Qutpuk Quality Output Separator i Decodes
293. s button position is selected To cancel Auto Framing quickly press and release the EZ Button Load New Master Functions in the same way as New Master Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button 5 120 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Two Beeps Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illuminate EZ Button Enabled Default On Power on Enabled Single Beep Read Rate Calibration Three Beeps Disabled Auto Framing Options Calibration Laser Framing Save for Power on Auto Framing Load New Master Sleep mode Bar Code Configuration Disabled When set to Disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected Read Rate will perform decodes second and is the same as sending a lt C gt from ESP s Terminal To exit Read Rate quickly press and release the E
294. s can be extracted and inserted using Symbol Parse In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output Output Index Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until the string is built Start Location Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output Length Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output 4 12 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Setup Insert Symbol Parse Insert Data Extract Range a
295. s considered the home position Raster Setup Status Disabled Top OFFsek et te O 255 Bottom Offset lz Sweep Rate 10 Read Cycle On OrF Disabled Bottom Offset A value of 0 the side opposite the scanner connectors the top of the scanner A value of 255 the side with the connectors the bottom of the scanner lf Top Offset is greater than Bottom Offset then Top defines the raster position in a straight line only If Top is less than Bottom then the raster will sweep back and forth between the Top and Bottom offsets if the sweep rate is greater than 0 Raster Setup Status Disabled Top Offset 177 Bottom Offset i oe 0 255 Sweep Rate 10 Read Cycle On OrF Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 67 Read Cycle Sweep Rate Sweep rate defines how many times per second the raster passes between the Top Offset and Bottom Ooffset For example if sweep rate is set to 3 and the raster is starting at the Top Offset it will reach the bottom offset in 1 3 of a second Raster Setup Status Disabled Top Offset 127 Botkorm OfFsek 127 Sweep Rate i 0 O 200 Read Cycle On Orr Disabled Read Cycle On Off Always start a read cycle with the raster at the Top Offset then enable the Read Cycle On Off parameter Note The sweep rate must be significantly faster than the triggering rate in order for this feature to be effective Raster Setup 5 68 Sta
296. s increments Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 0 Pulse Options 0 Pulse 1 Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin 2 Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition 3 Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Output 2 Parameters Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Configurable Output 3 Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt A 72 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt Master Symbol lt K231 index master symbol data gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt Matchcode Matchcode Type Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Wild Card 3 Sequential Sequential Matching Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on No Read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0
297. s laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser Framing Status Serial Cmd lt K700 aser on off status laser framing status aser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Laser On Position Serial Cmd lt K700 laser on off status laser framing status laser on position aser off position laser power gt Default 10 Options 10 to 90 Laser Off Position Serial Cmd lt K700 laser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 95 Options 15 to 95 A 42 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Laser Power Serial Cmd lt K700 aser on off status laser framing status laser on position laser off position laser power gt Default 1 Medium Options 0 Low 1 Medium 2 High QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 43 Serial Commands Configuration Database Number of Active Indexes lt K252 number of active indexes number of database cycles gt Configuration Database lt K253 index gain AGC mode tracking raster top raster bottom raster speed framing status laser on position laser off position laser power background color gt Switch Timing lt K254 switch mode frame count time gt Number of Active Indexes Number of Active Indexes Serial Cmd Default Options lt K252 nu
298. sbi Ae haantetaeh dlesteniedacres 3 7 Application Examples ccccccccscccceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseceeseeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaes 3 8 Chapter 4 Scanner Setup Calibrali o ieenteseeercem ers rene tse a a te ean ene 4 2 Contiguravon Database sisi eed it ee Cae ae Ree 4 4 ordered Oma xs5ie sah ase Secchi ca uo ee eee 4 6 QOUPULF OMA crashed ces ease epi end ee epee ee 4 10 Chapter 5 Scanner Parameters Communication sates sg geste e a a e eaeetes ect enasee 5 2 Read Cycles ipone tr ee erat eee ee oo ee ne ene eee ere an aera 5 43 SSVI OIO GIS S raa a a a A 5 70 I O Parameters a nnnnannnnnnunennnnennneninnnrnnnrirrrrrrrerrrerrrnnrrrnnrrrsnrreenreenres 5 107 WANG INC OC Oses a a a tag oe 5 168 IAGINOSIICS ecse e a 5 177 Chapter 6 Terminal ESTEVAN VN INOOW aiae A 6 2 IN ote seeder erect cteecten ce eden E T 6 3 Send hate Gnd Se eRe a ta AA ite a Paleo oh ia 6 4 MACOS erence tre er are ere tee eee ee ee CPT RR Ae ce ee ee eo 6 5 ii Table of Contents Terminal Window Menus ccccceeecceeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeaaeesaes 6 6 Chapter 7 Utilities Serial Utility Commands cs ccn cedars sec teacceet a eed beedtho ee ass 7 2 REAA TRAC case ees ech bt ee saree nec ccaime a a tek oases Ota 1 4 COUNEIS cece Saale E ahi A ak 7 6 Device COMMOM ase tae ce a er is aie ocd ee A 7 8 Differences from Defaullt ccccccccccccssececeeescesseeceseeeeesseeeeesseeesseeeeees 7 9 Master DalaAD ASC saanen A he Os aah i
299. selected in Number of Triggers 5 158 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Number of Triggers The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Output 3 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch Gutpuk State Normally Open Pulse width S00 Gutput Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers L 255 Number to Qutpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Number to Output On Example If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch Output State Normally Open Pulse width 500 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode No Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On D E 255 Decodes per Trigger T QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 159 I O Parameters Decodes per Trigger When set to this mode and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis the scanner will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of t
300. ser s Manual Scanner Parameters External Source Processing Mode Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the scanner External Source Processing Mode Command Disabled Command Command Command enables command processing in the scanner Data Data enables RS 232 B as a data source port Note The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two way Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports data is transmitted to the destination port and from the destination port to the source port QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 9 Communication RS 422 The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS 422 formatting R5422 Disabled Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Mone Stop Bits One Data Bits Eight Symbol Data Output Disabled Extra Symbol Information Disabled Diagnostics Qutpuk Disabled External Source Processing Mode Command Baud Rate Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings The rate at which the scanner and host transfer data back and forth Baud Rate 115 2K Parity Only changed if necessary to match host setting An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd Hone Stop Bits Only changed if
301. strial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities lt Zrdall gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will also default sticky settings Default Reset Save lt A gt Reset Will not save for power on lt Arp gt Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arc gt Reset and Recall Customer Default Parameters lt Ard gt Reset and Recall Microscan Default Parameters lt K gt All Status Request lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request lt K gt __ All Range Status Request Scanner Status nds Knmn gt Single Status Request Request Commands Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request lt Knnnd gt Default Customer Parameter 5 lt CAL gt Calibrate without Menu ther Serial Utility Coman lt gt Calibrate with Menu lt BCCFG gt Enter Bar Code Configuration QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 3 Read Rate Read Rate Click the Utilities button and then the Read Rate tab Utilities to display the Read Rate view ESP ESP Untitled Fie Model Options Connect View Help gt yy yzl Ez Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Parameters Setup Terminal Utilities Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Digital Bar Code Firmware f Decodes sec J 5 To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and Percent og Clear Output then the Start button To see the percentage of dec
302. symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol Mabchcode Makchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position Match Length wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step New Master Pin ar CI I hu _ D J Foal T ra uw Foal m MW B Click Delete to remove characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 171 Matchcode Sequence on No Read Sequence on No Read is useful when the scanner needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and Matchcode Type is set to Sequential the scanner sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Matchcode Matchcode Type Sequential Matching Match Stark Position Match Length Wild Card Sequence on Mo Read Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step Mew Master Pin Disabled Increment T Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequence on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequence on No Read 006 No Read 007 seq
303. symbol remains in the field of view lf End of Read Cycle Mode is set to New Trigger the scanner will send the current symbol data immediately but only once A new symbol appearing in the scanner s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol Caution In automated environments Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output the scanner will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1 regardless of the user defined configuration 5 44 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters External Level Initiate Read Cycle lt q Object 1 moving in front of the K oleae arial Causes a change in the trigger state Object ND which initiates the read cycle End Read Cycle gt The same object moving out of Object E3 the detector beam causes detector another change in the trigger nar state which ends the read cycle This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the scanner spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred External Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle persists until the ob
304. t a request for all available firmware checksums is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt e When lt a gt a request for the application code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt e When lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt e When lt f gt a request for the FPGA code checksum is sent the scanner returns lt f FPGA_CHECKSUM gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 19 Default Reset Save Default Reset Save Understanding and controlling the scanner s active saved and default settings is critical to its successful operation Serial Function Cmd ESP EZ Button Save to Reader 5 A Reset Will not save for power on lt A gt Send Noc ave No 3 S S Reset and Recall Power On Parameters lt Arp gt Send lt Arp gt from Terminal No N N amp Reset and Recall Customer Default es 9 S lt Arc gt Send lt Arc gt from Terminal No 6 Reset and Recall Mi Default O eset and Recall Microscan Defau aramee lt Ard gt Send lt Ard gt from Terminal No Save to Reader Save Current Settings for Power On lt Z gt Sand and Save No Save to Reader raan lt Ze gt Send and Save Customer No y Defaults for Power On Press and O Recall Customer Default Settings hold while ma and Save for Power On isi a
305. t 1 Read Rate Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Read Rate Good Read I O 1 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 I O 2 gt Default 1 Output Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active I O 2 Serial Cmd lt K751 status bar graph l O 1 1 0 2 gt Default 2 Input Active Options 0 Disabled 1 Output Active 2 Input Active Symbol Position Output Raster Position Output Status Serial Cmd lt K758 raster position output status scan position output status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 67 Serial Commands Scan Position Output Status Serial Cmd lt K758 raster position output status scan position output status separator gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Serial Cmd lt K758 raster position output status scan position output status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character Database Identifier Output Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default 0 Disabed Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Serial Cmd lt K759 status separator gt Default Space 0x20 Options Any 7 bit ASCII character EZ Button Global Status Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger 3 Unlatch Outputs 4 Parameter Switch Default on Powe
306. t Status Database Identifier Qutput Disabled Separator Character SP Disabled When this command is disabled no database identifier information will be output Enabled When this command is enabled the scanner will append a two digit number and the characters DB to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration Database For example if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with data capture during the read cycle the symbol data output will be data capture DBO2 If the database is not active no identifiers will be attached to output Separator Character The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier Database Identifier Output Disabled Separator Character oF Click Delete to remove characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 129 I O Parameters Input 1 Input 1 Disabled Active State Active Open Input Mode Determines the function of the Input pin TE ister Active State meer Reset Counts Unlatch Output When set to Disabled the Input pin has no impact on operation Disabled Reset Counts When set to Reset Counts a transition to the active state of the Input will cause the scanner to reset the internal counters Unlatch Output This setting is used in combination with any of the three outputs in Latc
307. t gt LRC Status lt K145 status gt ACK NAK Options lt K147 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Polling Mode Options lt K148 RES REQ STX ETX ACK NAK gt Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain lt K150DAIS Y gt Protocol Selection lt K160 protocol address protocol port gt External Data Routing lt K161 mode destination port ambles to source echo to source output at end of read cycle output at ETX output at timeout gt Array Communication Modes RS 232 A Baud Rate RS 232 A lt K162 mode source daisy chain i d status daisy chain i d gt Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 115 2K Options 0 600 3 4800 6 38 4K 9 230K 1 1200 2 2400 4 9600 5 19 2K T 57 6K 8 115 2K QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 25 Serial Commands Parity RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 0 One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits RS 232 A Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight RS 232 B Status RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Baud Rate RS 232 B Serial Cmd lt K101 status baud rate
308. ter Pin input whenever the associated button position is selected Sleep Mode When Sleep Mode is selected the scanner will shut the motor and laser off when this button position is selected To cancel Sleep Mode quickly press and release the EZ Button Bar Code Configuration Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the scanner can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ Button QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 123 I O Parameters Auto Framing Options When Enabled Laser Framing is performed when the Auto Framing button beep position is selected Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps or Four Beeps Auto Framing Options Laser Framing Enabled Disabled Enabled 5 124 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Status Indicators The side of the QX 870 features an array of LEDs that indicate various aspects of scanner activity MICROSCAN list Ist Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Read Rate Good Read To Qutpuk Active oz Input Active Controls the operation of the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs Note MOD and ACT function as one combined LED as do NET and LNK Status Indicators PHY Activity Bar Graph Oi PHY Activity laze Protocol Activit Disabled When set to Disabled the MOD ACT and NET LNK LEDs are
309. ters Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data Postamble Enabled Postamble Characters CE LF S0H 5Tx ETx EOT ENG ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FF CR so si DLE ci pc2 C3 DC4 NaK svn ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS AS us SP Click Delete to remove characters QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 39 Read Cycle Read Cycle Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs Then click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control z Parameters oy Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Multisymbal Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Closed bal Serial Trigger The indicates that the setting Active Closed i Decodes Before Oukput clive Closed is the default End of Read Cycle Processing Timeout 200 N Reader Setup Laser Setup A To open nested options To change a setting double click the single click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options Note Read Cycle settings can also be sent to the scanner from ESP s Terminal using Microscan s K command format Refer to the Read Cycle section of Appendix E QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Ma
310. the EZ Mode button 3 Ez Mode To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls Parameters ESP Values Communications RS232 A RS232 B Enabled R5422 Disabled The X Ethernet Enabled indicates 1 Left click on the to expand Protocol Selection Point to Point hat the setting is menu items External Data Routing Disabled default 2 Double click the desired Array Communication Modes Disabled parameter and single click J Jmm Disabled in the selection box to view Preamble Characters options Postamble A ir 3 Place the cursor in the selection box scroll down 4 Left click again on the open screen to complete the to the desired setting and selection single click the setting _ 5 Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the scanner The command can be sent without saving or sent and saved simultaneously Receive Reader Settings Send and Save Default tM Setti Braue APPEN MENA SETS Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default all ESP Settings Advanced Options d QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 15 Send Receive Options Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button These options can also be reached by right clicking in any of the configuration views Lap Send Recy Receiving
311. the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity up to 2 700 numeric characters 1 800 printable ASCII characters or 1 100 binary characters per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces ina 17 module structure PDF 417 Enabled Scan oun 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Fixed Symbol Length 10 Decode at End of Read Disabled Note Sending lt a1 gt from ESP s Terminal will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Characters This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Scan Count Raster Sweep Count Determines the number of raster sweeps before any in process stacked symbol decode attempt is abandoned Scan Count 65535 1 65535 Fixed Symbol Length Status When Enabled the scanner will reject any PDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Status Disabled Disabled Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Used to increase
312. tifies the symbol type When enabled the scanner analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data e closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology identifier e A C E F G I L e orp e A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN F Codabar G Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 L PDF417 and MicroPDF417 e GS1 DataBar RSS p Pharmacode e Modifier Example JC indicates a Code 128 symbol Symbalogy Identifier Disabled Disabled Enabled AlM ID Enabled Readable ID Disabled When set to Disabled symbol data output does not contain Symbology Identifier information Enabled AIM ID When set to Enabled AIM ID symbol data output contains a three character AIM Symbology Identifier sequence Enabled Readable ID When set to Enabled Readable ID symbol data output contains a human readable description of the decoded symbology Examples JCODE39 JCODE128 JUPCA JUPCEAN13 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 97 Symbologies Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 e For Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Check Moder hater Sartor a oss Sn 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes
313. tion Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the scanner Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration Leading Edge 313 Trailing Edge 313 External Trigger State Active Llosed Active Closed QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 47 Read Cycle Serial Trigger Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters lt and gt or in the case of non delimited triggers it must define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited SP Start Character Non Delimited 0x00 NUL Stop Character Mon Delimited 0x00 NUL Character Delimited Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Serial Trigger Character Delimited Stark Character Mon Delimite Stop Character Mon Delimite BPE eeg eeg mie 2kg F CI Lu I I p Fa T a ur m zER RR de si g WSI sil Click Delete to remove characters Note Serial Data or Seri
314. to Calibration Leading Edge Leading Edge uses only the first signal sample to calculate gain adjustments The Transition Counter value is used to determine which transition triggers the sample Important This option should only be used if recommended by a Microscan Sales or Applications representative as the other AGC modes cover most application requirements Continuous Continuous will take the highest value among any samples within a scan and use that value to make adjustments Reader Setup Gain Level 40 Tracking 40 Scan Speed 50 Automatic Sain Control 467 AGC Sampling Mode Continuous AGL Minimum Disabled AGC Maximum Leading Edge Symbol Detect Status Continuons Transition Counter 14 Maximum Element 400 Scan Width Enhance Disabled 5 58 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual AGC Minimum Scanner Parameters Sets a gain limit that AGC cannot go below when not in Fixed Gain operation Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode AGL Minimum AGC Maximum Symbol Detect Status Transition Counter Maximum Element Scan width Enhance AGC Maximum 40 40 a0 Continuous D 0 255 z259 Disabled 14 400 Disabled Sets a gain limit that AGC cannot exceed when not in Fixed Gain operation Reader Setup Gain Level Tracking Scan Speed Automatic Gain Control AGC AGC Sampling Mode Att Minimum AGC M
315. tral Serial Command Echo Status This command is useful in removing any doubt about the scanner s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the scanner will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings lf a command with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change Scanner Serial Verification Serial Command Echo Status Disabled Serial Command Beep Status tesa ane ControlfHes Output Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Causes the scanner to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed If an invalid command is entered the scanner beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activ
316. ttings from a text file to ESP configuration settings Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Using ESP Model The Model dropdown menu shows a list of recent scanners that have been used with ESP When a different model is chosen the connection to the present model is terminated Model Hew Model Remove Model To connect to another model select New Model choose a new model from the pop up menu that appears and click OK Note When an ESP file is saved the settings of all the models defined in that file are saved QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows the user to save memos and set up ESP Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP whenever Preferences ESP is opened next whether or not the ESP file is saved Options Document Mema Model Memo Preferences gt General Tab Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced The Toolbar Style el options allow the user C Reload Last File f Show Both lean and Text to determine how ESP will display the mode options in the two rows i Show Connect Prompt Only Show Text at the top of the screen On Startup Toolbar Style i Show Model Prornpt C Only Show leon Receive After Connect Skip EZ Mode Enable Send and Save
317. tus Disabled Top Offset 127 Bottom Offset iz Sweep Rate 10 Read Cycle On orf Disabled ii E l fa b E d x Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Symbologies Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display 57 the tree control tabs App Mode Then click the Symbologies tab to display the Symbologies tree control 7 Parameters y Communication Read Cycle Symbologies 1 0 Matchcode Diagnostics Parameters ESP Values Symbologies 1D Sy mbologies Code 39 Enabled l Code 126 Both Standard or Edge To Meo nested options single click the Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Codabar Enabled UPCIE SN Both Standard or Edge Code 93 Both Standard or Edge Pharmacode Disabled DataBar Expanded Disabled DataBar Limited Disabled DataBar Omnidirectional Disabled Stacked Symbologies PDF 417 Enabled Micro POF417 Disabled The indicates Composite Disabled that the setting AIAG Disabled is the default Quiet Zone Narrow Enhanced To change a setting Symbology Identifier Standard double click the Background Color Harrow setting and use the Depth of Field Enhance standard Enhanced cursor to scroll F Symbol Reconstruction Harrow Enhanced through the options Code Ratio Mode Note Symbologies settings can also be sent to the scanner from
318. ual Scanner Parameters ACK NAK Protocol The following are general outlines of the ACK NAK protocol Items that are framed by brackets can either be disabled or enabled LRC does not include STX but it does include preamble postamble and ETX Symbol Data Output TX to host STX preamble SYMBOL DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble or timeout waiting for more data are detected if REQ is disabled depending on what is enabled Commands from Host to Scanner TX to Scanner STX lt command gt ETX LRC Response from Scanner ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX or command ending angle bracket gt are received depending on what is enabled Command Response from Scanner to Host TX to host STX preamble COMMAND RESPONSE DATA postamble ETX LRC Response from host ACK NAK Sent when LRC ETX postamble command ending angle bracket gt or timeout waiting for more data are detected depending on what is enabled As with Polling Mode lt K140 5 gt the scanner can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK NAK mode If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK it will send REQ to request such a response if enabled When the sender receives an ACK too many NAKs or times out if already enabled it will send a RES if enabled to terminate the transaction Note See ACK NAK Data Flow Examples in Appendix E for sample ACK NAK communi
319. uction Effort is set to Minimum the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines However the required processing time will be limited to a minimum level so candidate symbols that are not valid will be rejected quickly Moderate When Symbol Reconstruction Effort is set to Moderate the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines The required processing time will be limited to a level that is expected to work optimally for most applications Moderate is the appropriate setting for most symbol reconstruction scenarios Moderate can still reject candidate symbols but there may be a noticeable pause in throughput Usually candidate symbols will either decode or self eliminate before the effort level is reached Maximum When Symbol Reconstruction Effort is set to Maximum the scanner will attempt to reconstruct symbols across multiple scan lines However if a large amount of processing Is required reconstruction is allowed to attempt all decode possibilities This Effort level may cause the system to stall on the present data as it attempts to decode all possibilities QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 103 Symbologies Symbol Ratio Mode Symbol Ratio Mode is useful for determining how much quality and data security validation will be applied when decoding a Code 39 Codabar or Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol Tight ratios will only decode a high quality symbol Standard rat
320. uence on No Read 007 007 008 Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 5 172 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Sequence on Mismatch Note Matchcode Type must be set to Sequential for this command to function Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur The scanner will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol Scanner Parameters Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position T Match Length 1 Wild Card T Sequence on Mo Read Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Sequence Step Mew Master Pin Disabled iz a b d x Enabled Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled Master Symbol Decoded Symbol Master Symbol after Decode 001 001 002 002 002 00
321. ul decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Diagnostic Warning Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met depending on the diagnostic option enabled In Read Cycle Activates a discrete output when the scanner is in a read cycle Read Cycle Data Valid Activates discrete output when all the data generated in the read cycle has left the scanner QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 143 I O Parameters Output State Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Output 2 Parameters Output Or Mismatch or No Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 2 Parameters 5 144 Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Coen Pulse Width oso 24 seconds Output Mode Pulse QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 2 Parameters Gukput On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 500 Output Mode Pulse ssi Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1
322. ure service message The screen capture below from ESP shows the QX 870 s four communications ports and the parameters for each Parameters Communications R5232 Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5232 B Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode R5422 Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode Ethernet IP Address Subnet Gateway IP Address Mode TCP Port 1 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode TCP Port 2 Symbol Data Output Extra Symbol Information Diagnostics Output External Source Processing Mode EtherNet IP Protocol Selection External Data Routing Array Communication Modes Preamble Postamble ESP Values 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled 115 2K None One Eight Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Disabled 115 2K None One Eight Disabled Disabled Disabled Command Enabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP 2001 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command 2003 Enabled Enabled Enabled Command Enabled Point to Point Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled RS 232 A RS 232
323. ure value that whenever the ambient temperature falls below it causes a low temperature message to be displayed If Low Temperature Threshold is set to zero the warning message will be disabled Status Allows the user to Enable or Disable the Low Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Status Disabled merece Disabled Enabled Message The user can enter a message of up to 10 characters that will be displayed whenever the ambient temperature falls below the Low Temperature Threshold Low Temperature Threshold Status Disabled 5 182 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Scanner Parameters Service Message Status When Enabled a Service Message of up to 128 characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service time has expired Service Message Status Disabled Service Message Disabled Threshold Enabled Resolution Seconds Service Message Allows the user to define a service message of up to 128 characters Service Message Status Disahled Service Messa SERVI CE Threshold UU Resolution Seconds Threshold Allows the user to determine the length of time until the service message will be sent Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 1 65535 Resolution Seconds Resolution The service timer has a resolution field for setting up the timer increment Options are increments of seconds or minut
324. urs minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 65535 Minutes Serial Cmd lt K407 hours minutes gt 16 bit counter 0 to 60 Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Threshold Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 0 Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 77 Serial Commands Laser Current Warning Message High Current Status Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low current status low current message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Message High Current Message Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message ow current status low current message gt Default HIGH _LASER Options Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters Low Current Status Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low current status low current message gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Message Low Current Message Serial Cmd lt K411 high current status high current message low cu
325. used decode at end of read cycle gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Decode at End of Read Cycle PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused decode at end of read cycle gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 57 Serial Commands Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 1 to 16 Minimum Bars Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 4 Options 1 to 16 Bar Width Status Pharmacode Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length minimum bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 0 Mixed Options 0 M
326. user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer click Note This feature cannot be used if the scanner is in Continuous Read When Service Unit is enabled a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer s limit has been reached The service timer is reset at power on meaning that the service timer s limit is the amount of time since last reset Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes Diagnostics Service Unit Disabled Disabled Enabled Laser Current High Activates output when the laser current exceeds factory defined upper limits Output 1 Parameters Gukpuk On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 50 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Gukpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger j Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Enabled 5 140 QX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Laser Current Low Scanner Parameters Activates output when the laser current drops below factory defined lower limits Output 1 Parameters Output On Qutouk State Pulse Width Output Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Number of Triggers Number bo Output On Decodes per
327. ustrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Note For a list of all K commands see Serial Commands on page A 10 Type Command Name Enter Decodes Second Test Read Rate lt Cp gt Enter Decode Percent Test Exit Decodes Second and Decode Percent Tests lt a1 gt PDF417 Information lt N gt No Read Counter Oo KOR O No Read Counter Reset L lt T gt Trigger Counter Cames Trigger Counter Reset Device Control Master Database Part Number Checksum Default Reset Save Good Read Match Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Programmable Output 1 Programmable Output 2 Programmable Output 3 Disable Scanner Enable Scanner Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index 1 lt Gn gt Store Next Symbol Read to Database Index n lt NEWM gt New Master Load Status Display All Firmware Part Numbers Display Application Code Part Number Display Boot Code Part Number Display FPGA Code Part Number _ E Display All Available Firmware Checksums Display Application Code Code Checksum Display Boot Code Checksum Display FPGA Code Checksum Save Current Settings for Power On Save Current Settings as Customer Default meee Parameters for Power On Recall Customer Default Settings and Save for oe Power On lt Zrd gt Recall Microscan Default Settings and Save for Power On Will not default sticky settings QxX 870 Indu
328. ut 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras The Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse and Output 3 Pulse buttons activate the link between the and Disable Reader send Motor Oft of the host connector The buttons in the Extras section can Disable or Enable Reader cend Motor On Enable the reader or deactivate and reactivate the motor Device Control Serial Utility Commands Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader sending lt I gt will turn the scanner OFF end the current read cycle and will not allow the scanner to enter another read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded or the scanner is being configured Disabling the scanner will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded Enable Reader sending lt H gt will turn the scanner ON and allow it to enter read cycles 7 8 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities D
329. ut Mode Normally Closed Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Mo Read Number of Triggers 0 Humber to Qutpuk Cr 0 Decades per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Pulse Width Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Wo Read Output State Normally Coen Pulse width 0 050 Seconds Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Trend Analysis Mode Ho Read Number of Triggers 0 Number to Qutpuk On 0 Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 5 133 I O Parameters Output Mode Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Output 1 Parameters Qutput On Mismatch or Wo Read Qutput State Normally Open Pulse Width so Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Pulse Number of Triggers Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Kumber te Output On Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Decodes per Trigger T Diagnostics High Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled Laser Current High Disabled Laser Current Low Disabled Low Temperature Disabled Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated whe
330. utput 2 lt K770 status default on power on gt lt K771 single beep two beeps three beeps four beeps gt lt K773 laser framing gt lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on decodes per trigger gt Diagnostics Output 1 lt K790 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 2 lt K791 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Diagnostics Output 3 lt K792 high temperature service unit unused laser current high laser current low low temperature gt Output 1 Parameters lt K810 output on output state oulse width output mode gt QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual A 21 Serial Commands Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on output state pulse width outout mode gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on output state oulse width output mode gt Matchcode Matchcode lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Master Symbol Database Size lt K224 number of master symbols gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt
331. utput status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 10 Options 1 to 128 Full ASCII Set Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check character status check character output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 0 Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Start Stop Match Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default 1 Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled A 50 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Appendices Start Stop Output Codabar Serial Cmd lt K471 status start stop match start stop output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status symbol length check character type check character output gt Default
332. window to a text file e Find Next searches for a user defined section of text in the Terminal e Find Previous operates in the same way as Find d Next but searches backward through Terminal text Find Previous ShiFE F3 Keyboard Macros QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual E Utilities Contents Serial Utility COMMANAS cccccccseeceeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeessseeeeeesaeeeesseaeeseesees 1 2 Rea RAC ar re eee ee aS 1 4 COUMO ee een EO cane Oe eee ae ee 7 6 Device CONTON emer nee ee ane ee mn nT ne ene eee aS a om A ae ere ee eee 7 8 Differences from Default oo ccccccccecceeceecceeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeaesentes 7 9 Master Database ia cede cenit deeecidec vind cdedass teed epdest dactinatuesiiaus aun usbidats weed denawadiaadvuseniesbecataedagashaddasaaenece 7 10 Diora Ba COUE eee ene E eee E ee eee ee ere ee eee 7 16 Fe RII h E E AE PEENE E tw sate casi E A ASE AE N AAT EAAS AE EE AAE A A EE E E A 7 17 Default ReseiSaV E enei n E a ee ee ce ee ee eee 7 20 Scanner status FROGS SIS sieniin eee eae a oE E a e EREE 7 22 Other Serial Utility Commands cccccccseseeecceceeeeececeueeeeceuececcseueeeessesseeecsuaeeeessueeeesseageeeesaas 7 23 Embedded Menus osaeraren oes ae ee eee 1 28 This section explains the function and purpose of serial utility commands which are generally performed during scanner operation QxX 870 Ind
333. x 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Caution If an index with existing data is selected that data will be overwritten by the new decoded data when this command is used QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 13 Master Database Request New Master Status Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read Send the lt NEWM gt command from ESP s Terminal The scanner returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt 7 14 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Utilities Delete Master Symbol Data Master symbol data can be deleted using ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number to be deleted 3 Delete text and click OK Master Symbol Database Size M Matcheode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Recerve Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master Symbol 1 Master Symbol 2 Master Symbol 3 Master Symbol 4 mn Fe wo Po Master 5 Symbol Data Delete test in this feld Cancel QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual 7 15 Digital Bar Code Digital B Utilities
334. y to create a back up set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings By first doing an EZ Button default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then recall the previous customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Restore Customer Defaults Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner if this feature is enabled Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with the lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Restore Microscan Defaults lf a software default and reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the scanner by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power on or a reset
335. ymbol length status fixed symbol length check character type check character output status gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check character status check character output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar range mode status gt UPC EAN lt K473 mode EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplementals type UPC E as UPC A gt Code 128 EAN 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length EAN status output format application record separator status application record separator character application record brackets application record padding separation factor gt Code 93 lt K475 mode fixed symbol length status symbol length gt PDF417 lt K476 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Phannaccde lt K477 status fixed bar count status fixed bar count minimum bar count bar width mode direction fixed threshold value gt DataBar Omnidirectional RSS 14 lt K482 status gt DataBar Limited RSS Limited lt K483 status gt DataBar Expanded RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt lt K485 status raster sweep count fixed symbol length status MICOR Esa fixed symbol length gt Symbol Reconstruction ee reconstruction redundancy symbol reconstruction Quiet Zone Serial Cmd lt K450 quiet zone status gt Default
336. ype document specific information here Options Preferences EES Type document specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information entered in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model epecific information here Options Preferences Document Memo siete Meno ae Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file to make them available in the next session If the current session is not saved any memos that have been entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in the next session 2 11 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Menu Toolbar Connect The Connect dropdown menu allows the user to access the Connection Wizard as well as the Autoconnect and Configure Multidrop dialogs Connect and Disconnect can also be performed directly from the dropdown menu without opening a dialog Connect Connection Wizard Auroconnecek Connect Disconnect Configure Multidrop Connection Wizard To connect using the Connection Wizard e Click Connect on ESP s menu toolbar and then select Connection Wizard e Select RS 232 or Ethernet to activate the appropri
337. ystem Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables 1 2 QxX 870 Industrial Raster Scanner User s Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Important When connecting Ultra Lock cordsets to the QX 870 and QX 1 align the pins first and then push the connector into place Do not twist the connectors as this will bend the pins Important Do not attempt to power more than four scanners with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration Add a QX 1 and one power supply for every four additional scanners in the daisy chain RS 232 e Connect the Serial Communication Cable from A on the QX 870 to 2 on the QX 1 e Connect the host cable from 1 on the QX 1 to the host computer e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QxX 1 e Connect the power supply to 3 on the QX 1 e Plug in the power supply Ethernet Important Configure Ethernet enabled readers off line and then connect to network when ready for dynamic use Note The QX 870 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset because the scanner itself performs automatic internal crossover transmit to receive switching Microscan offers a standard straight through un crossed Ethernet cordset 61 000160 01 e Connect the Ethernet Cable from B on the QX 870 to the network e Connect the photo sensor to T on the QX 1 e Connect the power supply to A on the QX 870 e Plug in the power supply

QX-870 Industrial Raster Scanner User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents